E-class
Operator’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
• Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
• Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
• Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety
of the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
DaimlerChrysler AG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mechanical keys .......................... 33
Doors ................................................. 34
Central locking switch.................... 36
Automatic central locking.............. 37
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident...................... 37
Tailgate.............................................. 38
Antitheft alarm system.................... 41
Tow-away alarm ............................... 43
Power seats front............................. 44
Front seat head restraints.............. 50
Rear seat head restraints ................ 51
Multicontour seat............................ 53
Seat heater........................................ 54
Seat ventilation................................ 57
Seat belts and integrated
Self-test BabySmartTM
without special
child seat installed .......................67
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS)................................ 68
Emergency tensioning
retractor (ETR)............................. 69
Airbags .............................................. 70
Safety guidelines for the
seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor
and airbag .................................... 76
Infant and child
restraint systems......................... 78
Steering wheel adjustment............. 81
Rear view mirrors............................ 82
Instrument cluster........................... 86
Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display................. 92
Trip and main odometer,
vehicle speed, FSS
Introduction
Product information .......................... 7
Operator’s manual............................. 8
Where to find it................................ 13
Reporting Safety Defects ................ 15
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls............... 18
Center console ..............................20
Overhead control panel ...............21
Operation
Vehicle keys...................................... 24
Start lock-out..................................... 27
General notes on the
central locking system ............... 28
Central locking system ................... 29
Radio frequency and
infrared remote control ...............29
Opening and closing windows
and sliding/pop-up roof
restraint system .......................... 59
Seat belts .......................................... 59
Seat belt nonusage
warning system........................... 60
BabySmartTM airbag
and engine oil level display....... 96
deactivation system.................... 67
Audio systems .................................. 97
Radio ..............................................97
CD player .......................................98
from outside ..................................32
Panic button ..................................33
Contents
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
2
Cassette player .............................99
Telephone........................................ 100
Telephone book ..........................100
Redialing .....................................102
Incoming call ..............................104
Navigation system.......................... 105
Trip computer................................. 106
Malfunction
message memory ...................... 108
Individual settings......................... 110
Setting the audio volume.............. 113
Flexible service system
(FSS)............................................ 114
Engine oil level indicator.............. 117
Engine oil consumption................ 118
Exterior lamp switch ...................... 119
Night security Illumination ......... 120
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 121
Combination switch....................... 122
Rear window wiper / washer....... 124
Hazard warning flasher
Basic setting ............................... 129 Illuminated vanity mirrors........... 160
Special settings .......................... 129 Interior............................................. 161
Defogging windows ................... 129 Armrest, rear bench ...................... 161
Defrosting ................................... 129 Cup holder in rear
bench armrest............................ 161
Glove box......................................... 162
Cup holder and coin holder
in glove box lid ...........................162
Storage compartment above
Rear window defroster ...............130
Air distribution ...........................130
Air volume ...................................130
Air recirculation .........................131
Dust filter .....................................131
Activated charcoal filter ............132
Residual engine
heat utilization ............................132
Front center console
compartment ventilation ...........133
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlet ...................134
Audio and telephone,
ashtray in center console......... 163
Storage compartments in
center console ........................... 163
Cup holder in center console....... 164
Ashtrays .......................................... 165
Lighter ............................................. 167
Split rear bench seat ..................... 168
Rear-facing bench seat.................. 174
operation ................................... 135 Loading instructions ..................... 176
Power windows.............................. 154 Cargo tie-down rings..................... 177
Sliding / pop-up roof..................... 156 Parcel net in front
passenger footwell.................... 178
Interior lighting............................. 159
Cellular telephone ......................... 178
Entrance lamps,
switch.......................................... 125
Automatic climate control............ 126
Display and controls ..................128
exit lamps in doors................... 159 Garage door opener ....................... 179
Sun visors....................................... 160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires ..............................................214
Snow chains ................................216
Winter driving instructions ......217
Block heater .................................218
Deep water ...................................219
Passenger compartment ............219
Traveling abroad .........................219
Cruise control ................................ 220
Brake assist system
(BAS)........................................... 223
Antilock brake system
(ABS) .......................................... 225
Four wheel electronic
traction system (4MATIC) ....... 227
Electronic stability program
(ESP)........................................... 228
Parking assist (Parktronic).......... 232
What you should know
at the gas station ...................... 237
Check regularly and before
Driving
Instrument cluster display
Control and operation of radio
transmitters ............................... 184
The first 1 000 miles
Malfunction and indicator
lamps in the
instrument cluster .................... 242
On-board
diagnostic system .......................242
Check engine malfunction
indicator lamp .............................242
Brake warning lamp ..................243
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS)
indicator lamp .............................244
Fuel reserve and fuel cap
placement warning ....................244
Electronic stability program
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............245
BAS / ESP malfunction
indicator lamp .............................245
ABS malfunction
(1 500 km) ................................. 185
Maintenance................................... 185
Tele Aid............................................ 186
Catalytic converter......................... 196
Emission control............................ 197
Steering lock................................... 198
Starting and turning off
the engine .................................. 200
Automatic transmission................ 201
Parking brake................................. 210
Driving instructions ...................... 211
Drive sensibly -
Save Fuel ..................................... 211
Drinking and Driving ................ 211
Pedals ........................................... 211
Power assistance ........................ 212
Brakes ..........................................212
Driving off ................................... 213
Parking ........................................ 213
indicator lamp .............................245
Seat belt warning lamp .............246
Malfunction and indicator
a long trip .................................. 239
lamp in the center console ...... 246
Contents
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp .............................246
Malfunction and warning
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
(Electronic stability program) .260
Changing wheels ........................... 277
Tire inflation pressure.................. 282
Battery ............................................. 283
Jump starting.................................. 285
Towing the vehicle......................... 288
Practical hints
messages in the
multifunction display............... 247
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................248
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR .........249
ABS-SYSTEM ...............................250
BRAKE ASSIST ...........................250
BRAKE LINING WEAR ..............251
BRAKE FLUID .............................251
PARKING BRAKE .......................252
ENGINE FAN ...............................252
COOLANT (coolant level) ..........253
COOLANT TEMP. (coolant
temperature) ...............................254
LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................255
LIGHT SENSOR ...........................256
REMOVE KEY .............................256
TELE AID .....................................257
STEERING GEAR OIL .................257
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................258
WASHER FLUID ..........................259
First aid kit..................................... 262
Fuses ............................................... 263
Electrical outlet.............................. 265
Hood ................................................ 266
Checking engine oil level............. 268
Automatic transmission
fluid level................................... 269
Coolant level................................... 269
Adding coolant ...........................270
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking.................. 290
Exterior lamps................................ 291
Headlamp assembly ...................292
Taillamp assemblies ..................295
Changing batteries in the
electronic main key .................. 298
Synchronizing
remote control ............................300
Emergency engine
shut-down................................... 300
Emergency operation of
sliding / pop-up roof................. 301
Manual release for
fuel filler flap............................. 302
Replacing wiper blade insert....... 302
Roof rack ......................................... 305
Windshield and headlamp
washer system .......................... 271
Windshield and headlamp
washer fluid mixing ratio .........271
Spare wheel, vehicle tools............ 272
Vehicle jack.................................... 273
Wheels ............................................ 274
Tire replacement ........................274
Rotating wheels .........................275
Spare wheel..................................... 276
Spare wheel bolts .......................276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upholstery ...................................313
Hard plastic trim items ..............313
Plastic and rubber parts ............313
Vehicle care
Index
Cleaning and care of
Index................................................ 330
the vehicle.................................. 308
Power washer ..............................309
Tar stains .....................................309
Paintwork, painted body
components .................................309
Engine cleaning .......................... 310
Vehicle washing ......................... 310
Ornamental moldings ................ 310
Headlamps, taillamps,
Technical data
Spare parts service ........................ 316
Warranty coverage ......................... 316
Identification labels....................... 317
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............ 318
Technical data................................. 319
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -
capacities................................... 322
Engine oils...................................... 324
Engine oil additives ...................... 324
Air conditioner refrigerant .......... 324
Brake fluid...................................... 324
Premium unleaded gasoline........ 325
Fuel requirements......................... 325
Gasoline additives......................... 326
Coolants.......................................... 326
Consumer information ................. 328
turn signal lenses ...................... 310
Cleaning the parktronic
system sensors ........................... 311
Window cleaning ........................ 311
Wiper blades ............................... 311
Light alloy wheels ...................... 312
Instrument cluster ..................... 312
Steering wheel and
gear selector lever ...................... 312
Cup holder ................................... 312
Seat belts ..................................... 312
Headliner ..................................... 312
Contents
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product information
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance
or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.
Introduction
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
8
Operator’s manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize
yourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
• New Car Limited Warranty,
• Emission System Warranty,
• Emission Performance Warranty,
• California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
(California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),
• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC or its authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fails to conform the vehicle to its express warranties
after a reasonable number of repair attempts during the period of one year or 12 000 miles from original delivery of
the vehicle. A reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer (1) if the vehicle is out of service by
reason of repair of substantial nonconformities for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days or (2) the same
substantial non-conformity has been subject to repair four or more times and you have at least once directly
notified us in writing of the need to repair the non-conformity and have given us an opportunity to perform the
repair ourselves. Notifications should be sent to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Regional Office listed in the
Service and Warranty Information Booklet.
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
Introduction
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
10
Roadside assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can
contact you should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
• Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage
the catalysts,
• gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details,
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
In the USA:
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Introduction
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
12
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual
might differ from your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to find it
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.
• Driving: Important information on driving.
• Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
Explanation of color used:
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and
others appear on red background.
Introduction
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
14
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your
satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if
necessary contact us at the following addresses:
In the USA: Client Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
Introduction
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls............... 18
Center console ..............................20
Overhead control panel ...............21
Contents - Instruments and controls
17
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls
18
2
10
13
14
14
9
4
15
3
23
16 17 18
20 21 22
5
19
24
12
8
11
6
25
7
26
P68.10-2410-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Parking assist warning indicators, see page 234
2 Side defroster outlet
15 Air volume control for center air outlets
16 Left front seat heater switch, see page 54
Left front seat ventilation switch, see page 57
3 Side air outlet, adjustable
17 Headlamp washer switch, see page 121
18 Rear window wiper and washer switch, see page 124
19 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 125
20 Central locking switch, see page 36
4 Air volume control for side air outlet
5 Exterior lamp switch, see page 119
6 Parking brake release, see page 210
7 Hood lock release, see page 266
8 Combination switch, see page 122
9 Cruise control switch, see page 220
10 Instrument cluster, see page 86
21 Tow-away alarm switch, see page 43
Indicator lamp for antitheft alarm system,
see page 41
22 Right front seat heater switch, see page 54
Right front seat ventilation switch, see page 57
11 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 92
Horn (with electronic key in steering lock
position 1 or 2)
23 Glove box (illuminated with electronic key in
steering lock position 1 or 2)
Airbag, see page 70
24 Automatic climate control, see page 126
Rear window defroster switch
12 Steering lock with ignition/starter switch,
see page 198
Activated charcoal filter switch
13 Voice recognition system switch, see separate
25 Audio system, see page 135
operating instructions
26 Storage/eyeglasses compartment
14 Center air outlets, adjustable
Instruments and controls
19
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Center console
20
1 Ashtray with lighter, see page 165
2 ESP control switch, see page 230
3 Power window switches, front doors, see page 154
4 Power window safety switch, rear doors,
see page 155
5 Airbag Off indicator lamp, see page 246
1
6 Power window switches, rear doors, see page 154
7 Parktronic system deactivation switch, see page 236
8 Mirror adjustment switch, see page 82
2
3
4
3
5
6
6
7
8
P68.20-2258-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overhead control panel
1 Interior lighting, see page 159
2 Sliding/pop-up roof, see page 156
3 Rear view mirror, see page 82
4 Garage door opener, see page 179
5 Tele Aid (emergency call system), see page 186
6 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid, telephone and
voice recognition system
5
6
Instruments and controls
21
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Contents - Operation
22
Rear seat head restraints ................ 51 Steering wheel adjustment............. 81
Multicontour seat............................ 53 Rear view mirrors............................ 82
Seat heater........................................ 54 Instrument cluster........................... 86
Seat ventilation................................ 57 Multifunction steering wheel,
Operation
Vehicle keys...................................... 24
Start lock-out..................................... 27
General notes on the
central locking system ............... 28
Central locking system ................... 29
Radio frequency and
infrared remote control ...............29
Opening and closing windows
and sliding/pop-up roof
multifunction display................. 92
Seat belts and integrated
restraint system .......................... 59 Trip and main odometer,
vehicle speed, FSS
Seat belts .......................................... 59
and engine oil level display....... 96
Audio systems .................................. 97
Radio ..............................................97
CD player .......................................98
Cassette player .............................99
Telephone........................................ 100
Telephone book ..........................100
Redialing .....................................102
Incoming call ..............................104
Navigation system.......................... 105
Trip computer................................. 106
Malfunction
Seat belt nonusage
warning system........................... 60
BabySmartTM airbag
deactivation system.................... 67
from outside ..................................32
Self-test BabySmartTM
Panic button ..................................33
Mechanical keys ...........................33
Doors.................................................. 34
Central locking switch.................... 36
Automatic central locking .............. 37
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident ...................... 37
Tailgate .............................................. 38
Antitheft alarm system ................... 41
Tow-away alarm................................ 43
Power seats front ............................. 44
Front seat head restraints .............. 50
without special
child seat installed ...................... 67
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS)................................ 68
Emergency tensioning
retractor (ETR) ............................ 69
Airbags.............................................. 70
Safety guidelines for the
message memory ...................... 108
Individual settings......................... 110
Setting the audio volume............... 113
Flexible service system
seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor
and airbag..................................... 76
Infant and child
(FSS)............................................ 114
restraint systems ........................ 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil level indicator.............. 117
Engine oil consumption................ 118
Exterior lamp switch ...................... 119
Night security Illumination ......... 120
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 121
Combination switch....................... 122
Rear window wiper / washer....... 124
Hazard warning flasher
Activated charcoal filter ............132 Glove box......................................... 162
Residual engine
heat utilization ............................132
Front center console
Cup holder and coin holder
in glove box lid ...........................162
Storage compartment
compartment ventilation ...........133
Rear passenger compartment
above ashtray in
center console ........................... 163
adjustable air outlet ...................134 Storage compartments in
center console ........................... 163
Audio and telephone,
operation ................................... 135 Cup holder in
switch.......................................... 125
Automatic climate control............ 126
Display and controls ..................128
Basic setting ................................129
Special settings ..........................129
Defogging windows ....................129
Defrosting ....................................129
Rear window defroster ..............130
Air distribution ...........................130
Air volume ...................................130
Air recirculation ......................... 131
center console ........................... 164
Power windows.............................. 154
Sliding / pop-up roof..................... 156
Interior lighting............................. 159
Entrance lamps,
Ashtrays .......................................... 165
Lighter ............................................. 167
Split rear bench seat ..................... 168
exit lamps in doors................... 159 Rear-facing bench seat.................. 174
Sun visors....................................... 160 Loading instructions ..................... 176
Illuminated vanity mirrors .......... 160 Cargo tie-down rings..................... 177
Interior............................................. 161 Parcel net in front
passenger footwell.................... 178
Cellular telephone ......................... 178
bench armrest ............................ 161 Garage door opener ....................... 179
Armrest, rear bench....................... 161
Cup holder in rear
Dust filter .................................... 131
Contents - Operation
23
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Vehicle keys
24
Included with your vehicle are:
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
• 2 electronic main keys with integrated radio
frequency and infrared remote controls plus
removable mechanical key.
• 1 electronic reserve key without remote control
functions, plus removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two electronic main keys are a different color to help
distinguish it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic main key
When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations,
it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control.
To do so, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the
mechanical key (2) in direction of arrow (4).
The remote control transmitter is located in the
electronic main key.
1
The infrared receivers are located in the front door
handles.
Notes:
3
Remove the mechanical key from the electronic main
key when using valet parking service. To prevent access
to storage compartments lock them separately and
retain the mechanical key.
2
4
P80.35-2030-26
The electronic main key has an integrated radio
frequency and infrared remote control, plus removable
mechanical key.
See page 38 for separate locking of tailgate and
page 162 for locking of glove box.
The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle.
The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door,
tailgate, and storage compartment locks.
Central locking system
25
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Electronic reserve key
26
The electronic reserve key (1) works only in the steering
lock. There are no batteries inside the electronic reserve
key.
The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door,
tailgate, and storage compartment locks.
1
To use the mechanical key (2), remove it from its
electronic reserve key (1).
Note:
We recommend that you carry the electronic reserve
key plus mechanical key with you and keep it in a safe
place (e.g. your wallet) so that it is always handy. Never
leave the electronic reserve key in the vehicle.
P80.35-2036-26
The electronic reserve key is without remote control
functions, but with removable mechanical key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Obtaining replacement keys
Start lock-out
Important!
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Removing the electronic key from the steering lock
activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be
started.
Inserting the electronic key in the steering lock
deactivates the start lock-out.
Note:
In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is
in order), the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-
MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Central locking system
27
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Important!
Car care
Index
Central locking system
28
General notes on the central locking system
If the electronic key is inserted in the steering lock, the
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote
control.
When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.
• Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either front door
handle. Check the batteries of the electronic main
key, see page 298, or synchronize the remote
control, see page 300.
• Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle. To
start engine, insert the electronic key in the steering
lock. There could be a slight delay until the
electronic key can be turned in the steering lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Central locking system
4
Radio frequency and infrared remote control
3
The electronic main key has an integrated radio
frequency and infrared remote control.
2
1
Due to the extended operational range of the remote
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If
one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check
lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are
in order. See page 298 for checking batteries.
5
P80.35-2033-26
The vehicle doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap can be
centrally locked and unlocked via remote control.
1 Transmit button
‹ Locking
Opening and closing the windows and sliding / pop-up
roof remotely can only be done with the infrared portion
of the remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a
receiver (6 or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ
or ‹.
ΠUnlocking
2 Lamp for battery check (see page 298 for changing
batteries if it does not light up briefly)
If the electronic key is inserted in steering lock, the
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote
control.
3 PANIC button
4 Transmitter eye
5 Locking tab for mechanical key
Central locking system
29
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
30
6
7
P80.30-2137-26
P80.30-2138-26
6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle
7 Infrared receiver in front passenger door handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking and unlocking with remote control
If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote
control, neither door nor tailgate is opened, the
electronic key is not inserted in the steering lock, or the
central locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will
automatically lock.
Unlocking:
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink
once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of
unlocking modes (see below):
Locking:
Press transmit button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked.
Selective unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door
and fuel filler flap.
Press transmit button Πtwice to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and tailgate.
If they do not blink three times, a door or tailgate is not
properly closed.
Note:
Global unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Πonce to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and tailgate.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic main key (if ok, battery
check lamp in electronic main key will light briefly
when pressing transmit button) or to synchronize the
remote control, see pages 298 and 300.
Notes:
If the tailgate was previously locked separately, it will
remain locked, see page 38.
The presently active unlocking mode (selective or
global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle
with the remote control (see below for changing mode).
Central locking system
31
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
32
Choosing global or selective mode on remote control
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close
after approximately 1 second.
Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ
simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the
remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times
indicating the completed mode change.
To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button.
Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.
Opening and closing windows and
sliding/pop-up roof from outside
(summer opening/convenience feature)
Warning!
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof
if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed
by the opening or closing procedure.
Aim transmitter eye of remote control at a door receiver.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the
procedure can be immediately halted by releasing
the remote control button. To reverse direction of
movement press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.
Summer opening:
Continue to press transmit button Πafter unlocking
the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open
after approximately 1 second.
Note:
To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit
button.
If the windows and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be
operated automatically by pressing the transmit button
of the remote control then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic main key (if ok, battery
check lamp in electronic main key will light briefly
when transmitting), or to synchronize the remote
control, see page 298 and 300.
Convenience feature:
Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panic button
Note:
For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or modification not expressly
approved by party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
P80.35-2034-26
Mechanical keys
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one
second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps
will operate for approximately 3 minutes.
The mechanical keys work only in the driver’s door,
tailgate, and storage compartment locks.
Notes:
To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic
key in steering lock.
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the mechanical key.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 302.
Central locking system
33
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Doors
34
4
2
3
1
P72.10-2240-26
1 Opening – pull handle
5 Front door from inside:
Pull handle to unlock.
2 Unlocking driver’s door
3 Locking driver’s door
When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the door lock button should move down.
4 Individual door from inside:
Each individual door must be locked with the respective
door lock button – the driver’s door can only be locked
when it is closed.
Push lock button down to lock.
Important!
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. When opening a door while the central locking
system is in the:
To unlock, pull inside door handles or turn mechanical
key in driver’s door lock to position 2.
Rear doors can only be opened from inside by first
pulling up on the door lock button.
• selective unlocking mode, only that individual door
is unlocked. The remaining doors, the tailgate and
fuel filler flap remain locked.
When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
• global unlocking mode, all doors, the tailgate and
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.
fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Notes:
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.
To lock, push down lock buttons and turn mechanical
key in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock
the tailgate.
Central locking system
35
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Central locking switch
36
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the global remote control mode,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a front door is
opened from the inside.
Notes:
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote
control, the doors and tailgate cannot be unlocked with
the central locking switch.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the central locking switch.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in
the steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Warning!
The central locking switch is located in the center
console.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
The doors and tailgate can only be locked with the
central locking switch, if front doors are closed.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the selective remote control
mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic central locking
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the
automatic central locking activated, the door will again
be automatically locked at speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
The central locking switch also operates the automatic
central locking.
With the automatic central locking system activated, the
doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler
flap remains unlocked.
Important!
When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:
To activate:
With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle
doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right
rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold
upper portion of switch (1) for a minimum of 5 seconds.
To deactivate:
With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold
lower portion of switch (2) for a minimum of 5 seconds.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking.
Notes:
Emergency unlocking in case of accident
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch
after activating the automatic central locking, and
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked
even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
The doors unlock automatically a short time after a
strong deceleration is detected, such as in a collision
(this is intended to aid rescue and exit).
Driving on rough roads may cause the vehicle to unlock.
If necessary, the vehicle can be locked again with the
central locking switch, see page 36.
Central locking system
37
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Tailgate
38
3 Recessed handle
The lock is located in the license plate recess.
4 Lock button
0 Neutral position
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Grip molding
6 Lock
To close the tailgate, pull down on inside grip (8) and
press down on outside grip molding (5) until the tailgate
latch engages. It is not necessary to slam the tailgate
closed, a power-assisted mechanism will draw the
tailgate quietly and automatically.
7 Recessed handle
Central locking system
39
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Important!
40
Notes:
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the tailgate can be locked and unlocked individually.
In case of danger, the closed tailgate can be opened with
the inside or outside handle.
To unlock, turn mechanical key in lock to position 1, or
push lock button to position 1.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
To lock, turn mechanical key in lock to position 2, or
push lock button to position 2.
Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always keep
hands and fingers away from the tailgate opening
when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful
when small children are around.
The rear compartment lamp will be switched off by the
contact switch only if the tailgate is fully closed.
When opening the tailgate completely, always make sure
that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
To prevent personal injury, never activate the
closing assist mechanism by tampering with the
tailgate latch.
When unlocking the tailgate with the mechanical key,
the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound.
In case the closing procedure causes potential
danger, the closing procedure can be immediately
halted by pulling the outside recessed handle.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 302.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antitheft alarm system
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed
with the remote control by locking or unlocking the
vehicle.
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately
10 seconds after locking the vehicle.
A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.
1
Operation:
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone:
• opens a door,
• opens the tailgate,
• opens the hood,
1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console
• attempts to raise the vehicle.
Antitheft alarm system
41
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Antitheft alarm system
42
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
activating element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds,
an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele
Aid on page 186.
Notes:
We recommend that you carry the electronic reserve
key plus mechanical key with you and keep it in a safe
place (e.g. your wallet) so that it is always handy. Never
leave the flat key in the vehicle.
When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic main key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow-away alarm
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,
insert the electronic key in the steering lock or press
button Œ or ‹ on the electronic main key.
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid
on page 186.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch
off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or
when parking on a surface subject to movement, such
as a ferry or auto train.
To do so, turn electronic key in steering lock to
position 0 or 1, or remove electronic key from steering
lock. Press tow-away alarm switch (1). The indicator
lamp (2) illuminates briefly.
The switch is located in the center console.
1 Press to switch off
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with the remote control.
2 Indicator lamp
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the
vehicle is locked again with the electronic main key, at
which time it is automatically reactivated.
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Tow-away alarm
43
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
44
Power seats front
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock your
vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with the
driver’s or front passenger door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position and the
belt properly positioned on the body.
To operate the front power seat adjustment switches,
turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2
(with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open, the
power seats can also be operated with the electronic key
removed or in steering lock position 0).
Never place hands under seat or near any moving
parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. The position should be as far rearward as
possible, consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
5
3 Seat cushion tilt
4
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your legs are lightly supported.
3
1
4 Backrest tilt
2
2
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your arms are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
P54.00-2074-26
5 Head restraint
The slide switches are located in each front door.
The height of the head restraint is adjusted
automatically with the seat so that the back of the
head is supported approximately at ear level. Adjust
the head restraint using the switch if the preset
position does not support the back of your head
approximately at ear level.
We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following
order:
1 Seat, up/down
Press the switch (up/down direction) until
comfortable seating position with still sufficient
headroom is reached.
Adjust the head restraint angle by hand.
Note:
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft
Your vehicle is equipped with power head restraints,
do not try to raise or lower them manually.
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a
comfortable seating position is reached that still
Seats
45
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Caution!
Car care
Index
Seats
46
Synchronizing head restraints
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or empty), the head restraints are no
longer adjusted automatically.
Do not remove head restraints except when mounting
seat covers. For removal refer to Head Restraints, Front,
see page 50. Whenever restraints have been removed be
sure to reinstall them before driving.
To resynchronize the adjustment feature, turn
electronic key in steering lock to position 2, move the
seat completely forward and the head restraint fully
down, and hold respective buttons for approximately
two seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
Three sets of seat/head restraint/steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirror positions may be programmed
into memory. After the seat/head restraint/steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors are positioned,
push memory button (6), release, and within 3 seconds
push position button “1”. A second and third set of
positions for the same seat/head restraint/steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors can be
7
programmed into memory by pushing first memory
button (6) and then “2”, respectively “3”.
6
Note:
P54.00-2075-26
For instructions on adjustment of steering wheel and
mirrors, see Page 81 and 82.
6 Memory button
7 Position buttons
Seats
47
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Important!
Car care
Index
Seats
48
Recalling positions from memory
To recall a seat/head restraint/steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirror position, push and hold
position button “1”, “2” or “3” until seat/head restraint/
steering wheel and exterior rear view mirror movement
has stopped. The seat/head restraint/steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirror movement stops when the
position button is released.
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust
the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft
placement and backrest angle to ensure adequate
control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head
restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See
also airbag section for proper seat positioning.
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure
adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort.
Caution!
Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be
adjusted for adequate rearward vision.
Do not operate the power seats using the memory
button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined
position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear
seats.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be
seated in a properly secured restraint system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.1.
First move the backrest to an upright position.
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in the back
seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or
child restraint system, which is properly secured
with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger-
side front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Seats
49
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
50
Front seat head restraints
Installation:
Push button (1) of the power adjustable head restraint
up for approximately 5 seconds.
1
Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop.
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.
For positioning of head restraints, see page 44 and 51.
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the
head approximately at ear level.
P82.40-2009-26
Removal:
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help
reduce injuries during an accident.
Push button (1) up to bring the power adjustable head
restraint to its highest position.
Pull out head restraint completely with both hands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear seat head restraints
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head
approximately at ear level.
Important!
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head
restraints in the upright position when the rear seats
are occupied.
Rear seat head restraint, removal
1
Removal:
Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push
button (1) and pull head restraint out.
P91.16-2019-26
Installation:
Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop.
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.
1 Head restraint release
Raising:
Pull up on head restraint.
Warning!
Lowering:
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Push head restraint release and push down on head
restraint.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help
reduce injuries during an accident.
Angle of head restraints:
The head restraint angle can be adjusted manually.
Seats
51
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
52
Rear seat head restraint, storage
For improved rear vision, the head restraint for the rear
bench center seat can be removed if the seat is not
occupied.
To do so, remove head restraint (1) and store in
bracket (2) under seat cushion.
2
1
P91.16-2069-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multicontour seat (optional)
Some models may be equipped with multicontour seats.
These seats have movable seat cushions, and inflatable
air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
1
The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously
varied with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the
electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
2
3
4
The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with
rocker switch (4):
• press to the right – increase side support,
• press to the left – decrease side support.
P91.25-2025-26
If the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is
retained in memory, and automatically adjusts the
cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted.
We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the
following order:
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
Seats
53
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
54
Seat heater
Notes:
The seat heaters can be switched on with the electronic
key in steering lock positions 1 or 2.
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the
seat heater longer than necessary.
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too
many power consumers are switched on at the same
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,
the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both
indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode).
The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as
soon as sufficient voltage is available.
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to
you, the seat heaters can be switched off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles without seat ventilation
Press switch to turn on seat heater:
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in
the switch lights up.
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in
the switch light up.
1
After approximately 5 minutes in the rapid seat
heating mode, the seat heater automatically
switches to normal operation and only one indicator
lamp will stay on.
2
Turning off seat heater:
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.
P54.25-2036-26
If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of
switch.
The front seat heater switches are located in the center
console.
If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after
approximately 30 minutes of operation.
Seats
55
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
56
Vehicles with seat ventilation
Rapid heating mode:
Press button (3) once.
Both red indicator lamps above the button light up.
The system switches over to normal heating mode
automatically after approximately 5 minutes.
Normal heating mode:
Press button (3) twice.
One red indicator lamp above the button lights up.
The seat heater will be automatically switched off after
approximately 30 minutes.
Turning off the heater:
Press the button (3) again.
The indicator lamps go out. The seat heater is switched
off.
The front seat heater switches are located in the center
console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat ventilation
Level 3 ventilation setting (maximum):
Press button (1).
Three blue indicator lamps beside the button light up.
The level of ventilation is decreased one step
approximately every 10 minutes.
Level 2 ventilation setting (middle):
Press button (1) again.
Two blue indicator lamps beside the button light up.
Level 1 ventilation setting (minimum):
Press button (1) again.
One blue indicator lamp beside the button lights up.
The front seat ventilation switches are located in the
center console.
Turning off seat ventilation:
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
If one blue indicator lamp is on, press button (1) once.
If two blue indicator lamps are on, press button (1)
twice.
If three blue indicator lamps are on, press button (1)
three times.
Seats
57
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
58
Notes:
When in operation, the seat ventilation consumes a
large amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to
use the seat ventilation longer than necessary.
The seat ventilation may automatically switch off if too
many power consumers are switched on at the same
time or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,
one or more indicator lamps in the switch will blink.
The seat ventilation will switch on again automatically
as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
If the blinking indicator lamps pose a distraction, the
seat ventilation can be switched off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts and integrated restraint system
Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats,
emergency tensioning retractors for all outboard seat
belts, dual front airbags, door mounted side impact
airbags and head protective window curtain airbags.
Their protective functions are designed to complement
one another.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.
Seat belts
Important
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require
seat belt use.
All states and provinces require use of child restraints
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt.
For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly
recommend their use.
Restraint systems
59
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
60
Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.
You and your passengers should always wear seat
belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be
considerably more severe without your seat belt
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed.
Note:
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see page 312.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death
is lessened if you ar wearing your seat belt.
Seat belt nonusage warning system
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, a
warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened.
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate
seat belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fastening of seat belts
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not
twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury.
To help avoid severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt should
be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not
across the abdomen.
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure your passengers are properly
restrained – even those sitting in the rear.
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
Restraint systems
61
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
62
4
P91.40-2060-26
P91-10-2077-26
4 Button for belt outlet height adjustment
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder
portion up.
Raising:
Slide belt outlet upward.
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled
snug and checked for snugness immediately after
engaging it.
Lowering:
Press button (4) and slide belt outlet downward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it
should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can
adjust the height of the belt outlet. Three positions are
available for the front seats, five positions are available
for the split rear bench seats.
Rear-facing bench seat
Caution!
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt
positioning.
Operation
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during
sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the
belt.
If the rear-facing bench seat is not being used, slip the
seat belt webbings into the retainers (5).
The locking function of the reel may be checked by
quickly pulling out the belt.
Restraint systems
63
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
64
Unfastening of seat belts
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.
• Seat belts can only work when used properly.
Never wear seat belts in any other way than as
described in this section, as that could result
in serious injuries in case of an accident.
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all
times, because seat belts help reduce the
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries
in accidents, including rollovers. The
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”
(driver airbag, front passenger airbag, front
and rear door mounted side impact airbags,
head protection window curtain airbags for
side windows), “ETR” (seat belt emergency
tensioning retractors), and front seat knee
bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted occupants
in certain frontal (front airbags) and side (side
impact and window curtain airbags) impacts
which exceed preset deployment thresholds.
Push the release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by
guiding the latch plate (1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is
positioned across your abdomen, it could cause
serious injuries in a crash.
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to
manage impact forces, The twisted belt against
your body could cause injuries.
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might
cause injuries.
• Pregnant women should also use a lap-
shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be
positioned as low as possible on the hips to
avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,
against your neck or off your shoulder. In a
crash, your body would move too far forward.
That would increase the chance of head and
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which
could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the
floor in front of the seat.
• Each seat belt should never be used for more
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or
other objects.
Restraint systems
65
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
66
Warning!
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the light
remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
With the special child seat properly installed, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy. The 7
indicator lamp located on the center console will be
illuminated, except with electronic key removed or in
steering lock position 0. The system does not deactivate
the door mounted side impact airbag and the window
airbag.
Self-test BabySmartTM
without special child seat installed
After turning electronic key in steering lock to position
1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp located on the center
console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then
extinguishes.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Warning!
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to
operate with it. It will not work with child seats
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or is
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating
any child on the front passenger seat.
Never place anything between seat cushion and
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the
effectiveness of the deactivation system.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Restraint systems
67
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
68
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
Seat belt fastened
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not
designed to deploy.
• first threshold exceeded:
ETR activates
• second threshold exceeded:
airbag also activates
Seat belt not fastened
Front seats:
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to
activate either the Emergency Tensioning Retractor
(ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.
• first threshold exceeded:
airbag activates, but not ETR
Rear outer seats:
• first threshold exceeded:
ETR activates
Driver, front passenger and rear outer seat systems
operate independently of each other.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-
overs, certain side impacts, or other accidents without
sufficient frontal or rear forces, the emergency
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver
and passengers will then be protected by the fastened
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.
The seat belts for the front and outer rear seats are
equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These
tensioning retractors are located in each belt’s inertia
reel and become operationally ready with the electronic
key in steering lock position 1 or 2.
For seat belt and emergency tensioning retractor safety
guidelines, see page 76.
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during
frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS
and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level.
They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the
seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its
forward movement as much as possible.
Restraint systems
69
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
70
Airbags
The most effective occupant restraint system yet
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver
and front passenger airbags can provide increased
protection for the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds.
2
Door mounted side impact and head protection window
curtain airbags can provide increased protection to
belted outboard occupants on the impacted side of the
vehicle in side impacts exceeding its preset threshold.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument
cluster when turning the electronic key in steering lock
to position 1 or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go
out after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes
out, the system continues to monitor the components
and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a
malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not
come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after
1
P91.60-2248-27
approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a
malfunction in the system has been detected.
1 Driver airbag
2 Front passenger airbag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following system components are monitored or
undergo a selfcheck: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition
circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning
retractors, seat sensor.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
Initially, when the electronic key is turned from steering
lock position 0 to position 1 or 2, malfunctions in the
crash-sensors are detected and indicated (the “SRS”
indicator lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does
not come on).
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Note:
In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has
gone out following the initial check, interruptions or
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the
driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses,
and low voltage in the entire system are detected and
indicated.
See page 244 for information on the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp.
Restraint systems
71
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
72
Front airbags
Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags
The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to
activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a
preset threshold.
The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front
passenger seat is occupied and the 7 indicator lamp
on the center console is not illuminated.
Note:
Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to
the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in
that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to
deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.
P91.60-2170-26
3 Side impact airbag
4 Window curtain airbag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Side impact airbags
Important!
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only
the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the
vehicle deploy.
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact
and head protection window curtain airbags)
impacts which exceed preset thresholds.
The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys
only if the front passenger seat is occupied.
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will
they provide their supplemental protection.
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.
The driver and passenger should always wear their
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags
to provide their supplemental protection.
Note:
Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the
front passenger-side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or
other accidents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be protected by
the fastened seat belts.
Window curtain airbags
The head protection window curtain airbags afford
greater protection against injuries to the head and
upper body. They fill up in the area between the A and
C pillars (see arrows) between the side windows and an
occupant’s head.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
The window curtain airbags are designed to activate
only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. Only the head protection window curtain
airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys.
Restraint systems
73
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
74
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags
which are designed to activate in certain impacts
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash
protection for occupants.
Warning!
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or
side (side impact and head protection window
curtain airbags) impacts which may cause
significant injuries, however, no system available
today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or door.
Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags
inflate, it is very important for the driver and front
passenger to always be in a properly seated
position and to wear their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a collision
always be in normal seated position with your back
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and
ensure that it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the airbag. Occupants who are
unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag
can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with
your back against the backrest.
• Occupants, especially children, should never
lean their heads in the area of the door where
the side airbag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the
seatbelts and appropriate size infant or child
restraint system
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of
vehicle controls. distance from the center of
the driver’s breastbone to the center of the
airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at
least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of
adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any problems, please see your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
Benz authorized Baby SmartTM compatible
child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to
deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will be
struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash.
If this happens, serious or fatal injury can
result.
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim
can increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury when driver front airbag
inflates.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injuries to you or other occupants.
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
Restraint systems
75
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
76
Warning!
If you believe that, even with the use of these
guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat
occupants to have both rear door mounted side
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be
accomplished upon your written election to do so at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an
additional cost. Please contact your local
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Client
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Accident research shows that the safest place for
children in an automobile is in the rear seat.
Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or
under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle,
you must properly use a BabySmartTM child
restraint which will turn off the passenger side
front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn
off the vehicle’s side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both front
and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility
for a side airbag related injury if occupants,
especially children, are not properly seated or
restrained when next to a side airbag which needs
to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor and airbag
Warning!
• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced and
their anchoring points must also be checked.
Use only belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow
these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially
children, should never place their bodies or lean
their heads in the area of the door where the side
airbag inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the side airbag be
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or
child restraint system for all children 12 years old
or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.
• Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Airbags and ETR’s are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency
tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated
must be replaced.
• Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to
possible injury through an unintended
activation of the “SRS”.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This
includes changing or removing any component
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of
• In addition, through improper work there is
the risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
additional trim material, badges etc. over the
steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag
cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims,
and installation of additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near “SRS”
components and wiring. Keep area between
airbags and occupants free of objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
• For your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety
instructions must be followed. These
instructions are available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Given the considerable deployment speed and
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the
possibility of abrasions or other injuries
resulting from airbag deployment.
• Do not use handles above doors for placing
such items as coat hangers etc..
• An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has
inflated. Do not touch.
When you sell the vehicle we strongly urge you to give
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with
an “SRS” by alerting him to the applicable section in the
Operator’s Manual.
Restraint systems
77
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Important!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
78
Infant and child restraint systems
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.
We recommend all infants and children be properly re-
strained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All
lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child
restraints.
Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of
compliance with this standard can be found on the
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting
sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt
retractor is activated. The belt is now locked.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in
the usual manner.
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Note:
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside
of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.
For child seats with mounting fittings for tether
anchorages refer to page 80 (installation of infant and
child restraint systems).
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will
be deactivated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning!
Infants and small children should never share a
seat belt with another occupant. During an
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
without one.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to
prevent the child restraint from becoming a
projectile in the event of an accident.
Restraint systems
79
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
80
Installation of infant and child restraint systems
3
3
3
P91.40-2207-26
To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely
fasten the hook (1), which is part of the tether strap, to
the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that
the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
This vehicle is provided with three tether anchorages
for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating
positions (3).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering wheel adjustment
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, push switch
forward or backward.
To raise or lower steering wheel, push switch up or
down.
Note:
The steering wheel position can be stored in memory
together with the seat/head restraint/exterior rear
view mirror positions, see page 47.
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
P46.00-2010-26
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2
(with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open, the
steering wheel can also be operated with the electronic
key removed or in steering lock position 0).
Steering wheel adjustment
81
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Rear view mirrors
Rear view mirrors
82
Note:
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the
mirror.
Inside rear view mirror
Manually adjust the mirror.
Use your inside mirror to determine the size and
distance of objects seen in the passenger-side convex
mirror.
Warning!
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.
Antiglare night position
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, the
mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in
light sensitivity.
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior lamp switched on, the mirror brightness does
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
First select the mirror to be adjusted - press button:
% Left mirror
& Right mirror
To adjust, toggle the switch forward, backward or to
either side.
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2, the
driver’s side mirror reflection brightness responds to
changes in light sensitivity.
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior lamp switched on, the driver’s side mirror
brightness does not respond to changes in light
sensitivity.
The switch is located on the center console.
Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
mirror. The passenger-side exterior mirror is
convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field
of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they
appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Rear view mirrors
83
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Important!
Car care
Index
Rear view mirrors
84
Note:
The exterior mirrors have electrically heated glass. The
heater switches on automatically, depending on outside
temperature.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle
paint finish can only be completely removed while in
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its
normal position, it must be repositioned by applying
firm pressure until it snaps into place.
Storing mirror positions in memory
The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in
memory with the seat/head restraint/steering column
position and can be recalled when necessary, see
page 47.
Warning!
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking position
One passenger-side mirror position can be stored in
memory. To do so:
The passenger-side exterior mirror can be adjusted and
programmed to assist the driver during parking
maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects
close to the vehicle).
1. Turn electronic key to steering lock position 2.
The vehicle must be stationary.
With electronic key in steering lock position 2, and the
exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger-side
position, the passenger-side mirror will be turned
downward when placing the gear selector lever in
“R” Reverse.
2. Select passenger-side mirror and adjust the mirror
to view the curb.
3. Press green memory button located in switch cluster
for driver seat, see page 47.
4. Within 3 seconds pull the mirror toggle switch
rearward. The mirror should not move.
The mirror position can now be adjusted as desired.
At speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), upon
shifting gear selector lever from “R” Reverse, or upon
pressing the driver’s side mirror button, the passenger-
side mirror will return to its previous position.
Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves.
5. Select driver side mirror. The passenger-side mirror
will return to its previous position.
Rear view mirrors
85
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Push buttons for intensity of instrument lamps,
8 Speedometer
see page 89
9 Trip odometer, see page 91 and 96
10 Main odometer, see page 96
11 Multifunction display, see page 92 and 247
2 Push button for resetting trip odometer, see page 91,
or to acknowledge a malfunction or warning
message, see page 108
3 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 90
12 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
switch on page 122
4 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement
warning lamp, see page 244
13 Tachometer, see page 91
5 Outside temperature indicator, see page 90
14 Gear range indicator display, see page 204
6 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
15 Clock
switch on page 122
To set the time, see page 110
7 ESP (Electronic stability program) warning lamp,
see page 245
Instrument cluster
87
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instrument cluster
88
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when the engine is running,
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel
management system, emission control
system, systems which impact emissions, or
the fuel cap is not closed tight. In all cases,
we recommend that you have the
CHECK
ENGINE
High beam
ABS malfunction, see page 245
ABS
Brake fluid low (except Canada).
Parking brake engaged, see page 243
BRAKE
malfunction checked as soon as possible,
see page 242
Brake fluid low (Canada only).
Parking brake engaged, see page 243
SRS malfunction, see page 244
BAS malfunction, see page 245
ESP malfunction, see page 245
SRS
Fasten seat belts, see page 246
Function indicator lamp on the center console
Front passenger airbag automatically
switched off, see page 246
ESP. Adjust driving to road condition,
see page 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activating instrument cluster display
The instrument cluster is activated by:
• Opening the door.
Instrument cluster illumination
• Pressing button J, V or W on the instrument
cluster.
• Turning the electronic key in steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
• Switching on the exterior lamps.
P54.30-2767-26
Activating the instrument cluster.
Press V or W button to vary intensity of instrument
lamps.
Instrument cluster
89
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge (3)
90
Outside temperature indicator (5)
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red
marking.
The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause
serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Adaption to ambient temperature takes place in steps
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions
(stop-and-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount
of temperature change.
Warning!
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated
can cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not designed
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated
temperatures just above the freezing point do not
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip odometer (9)
Tachometer (13)
To reset to “0” miles/km:
The red marking on tachometer denotes excessive
engine speed.
Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already
activated, see page 89.
Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer
appears if it is not displayed, see page 96.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted
if the engine is operated within the red marking.
Press button J (2) on the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster
91
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call
up, control and set the following systems in the
multifunction display:
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
Pressing the è button advances the display to the
next system.
Pressing the ÿ button returns the display to the
previous system.
1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 96
Vehicle speed, see page 96
Flexible service system (FSS), see page 114
Engine oil level indicator, see page 117
You may call up additional displays within some of these
categories by pressing the j or k button.
2 Audio systems, see page 97
Warning!
Radio, see page 97
A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/
her primary focus when driving.
CD player (optional), see page 98
Cassette player, see page 99
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting
features through the multifunction steering wheel
should only be done by the driver when traffic and
road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Programming individual settings in the system can
only be made while the vehicle is at standstill.
3 Navigation system (optional), see page 105
4 Malfunction message memory, see page 108
5 Individual settings, see page 110
6 Trip computer, see page 106
After start
After reset
Fuel tank content
7 Telephone (if so equipped), see page 100
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
93
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
94
Turn the electronic key in steering look to
position 1 or 2.
Press button:
3 è for next system
4 ÿ for previous system
1
5 j for next display in system
2
6
8
5
7
6 k for previous display in system
7 æ to increase the volume, see page 113
8 ç to decrease the volume, see page 113
9 í to dial a telephone number, see page 100
4
10
3
9
11
See page 104 for instructions on answering an
incoming call.
10 ì to end a call
11 Horn pad
P46.10-2165-27
1 Multifunction display
2 Multifunction steering wheel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
Note:
required system is displayed.
The displays in the multifunction display can be set to
German, English, French, Italian or Spanish language.
See the “TEXT” individual setting on page 110 for
instructions on changing the language setting.
Pressing the è button advances the display to the
next system.
Pressing the ÿ button returns the display to the
previous system.
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player,
cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.
You may call up additional displays in some systems by
pressing the j or k button.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
95
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
96
Trip and main odometer, vehicle speed,
FSS and engine oil level display
1 Trip odometer and main odometer
See page 88 for instructions on resetting the trip
odometer.
2 Vehicle speed
3 FSS (Flexible service system), see page 111.
4 Engine oil level indicator, see page 114.
Press è or ÿ button repeatedly until the trip
odometer and main odometer display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required display (2, 3, 4, 1) appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio systems
Radio
1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The radio is switched on.
3 Wave band setting and memory location number,
where appropriate.
4 Station frequency.
5 This only appears when “MEMORY” rather than
“FREQUENCY” has been selected in the Individual
settings. See page 110.
The radio must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press button j or k repeatedly until the required
station or frequency is displayed.
Use the j of k button to select a stored station or
station frequency. This depends on the selection made
in the “STATION SEARCH USING” setting menu.
See Individual settings, page 110.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
P54.30-2936-27
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
97
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
98
CD player (optional)
1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The CD player is switched on.
3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed
if you are using a CD changer.
4 Track number.
The radio must be switched on.
The CD player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required track number (4) is displayed.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on
the audio or the (optional) COMAND system located in
center dashboard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cassette player
1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The cassette player is switched on.
3 Side being played.
The radio must be switched on.
The cassette player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Pressing the j button fast forwards on to the next
track.
Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the
beginning of the current track.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
To select the reverse side of the tape, press button below
track number on the audio system display, or enter
request on the (optional) COMAND system located in
center dashboard.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
99
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
100
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Telephone
1 The telephone is switched off.
Telephone book
2 The vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or
receiver range.
3 The telephone is ready for use.
4 Name selected from the telephone book.
5 Number for the name selected. Dialing commences.
6 Dialing is completed. The name is displayed. The
display remains for the duration of the call.
7 Duration of call.
8
8 Memory location number.
P54.30-3578-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the í button when the name you require
appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is
dialed.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (3) appears. Refer to the separate telephone
instruction manual.
The name will be displayed when dialing is completed.
Display (6) remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically
forwards or backwards through the telephone book,
providing it was previously downloaded. See telephone
operator’s manual for details concerning downloading.
Pressing button j or k for longer than a second
“browses” rapidly through the telephone book. The
name selected appears in the display.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (3)
appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (3) appears.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
101
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
102
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Redialing
1 The telephone is ready for use.
2 Number or name stored in the redial memory.
3 Number in the redial memory — redialing has
commenced.
4 Dialing is completed and the name stored in the
telephone book is displayed or the number dialed
will remain displayed if no name has been stored.
The display remains for the duration of the call.
5 Duration of call.
6 Memory location numbers — the 10 most recently
dialed numbers are stored.
L0, most recently dialed number,
L1 to L9, previously dialed numbers.
P54.30-3580-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the í button when the required number or
name appears in the display (2).
The telephone number (3) is dialed.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
display (1) appears.
Once dialing is completed the name (4) is displayed if
the name is stored in the telephone book; failing that
the number dialed will remain displayed. The display
remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing the í button activates the redial memory
and the most recently dialed number is displayed.
Pressing the j or k button “browses” forwards or
backwards through the redial memory. The number
selected appears in the display.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (1)
appears.
Note:
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
103
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
104
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Incoming call
1 “CALL” — you are being called
Press the í button to answer the call.
Press the ì button to hang up or if you do not wish
to answer the incoming call.
The telephone must be switched on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation system (optional)
1 The navigation system is switched off.
2 The navigation system is switched on but no
destination has been specified.
3 The navigation system is switched on and
destination guidance is active.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
See the separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and
Data System) operator’s manual for notes on the
navigation system.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
P54.30-2985-27
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
105
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
106
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Trip computer
1 “AFTER START” — trip odometer records distance
from first engine start after more than five hours of
electronic key not being in steering lock position 2
2 “AFTER RESET” —trip odometer records distance
from first engine start until it is reset
3 Estimated range remaining and fuel tank contents
4 Distance covered “AFTER START” respectively
“AFTER RESET”
5 Elapsed time “AFTER START” respectively
“AFTER RESET”
6 Average speed “AFTER START” respectively
“AFTER RESET”
7 Average fuel consumption “AFTER START”
respectively “AFTER RESET”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
display (1) appears.
To reset the “AFTER START” (1) or “AFTER RESET” (2)
odometer memory at any time:
Press the j or k button until the display for trip
odometer memory “AFTER START” (1) and
“AFTER RESET” (2), or the display (3) for estimated
driving range remaining and fuel tank contents
appears.
Call up the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or
k button and press the J button in the instrument
cluster until the values are reset.
The “AFTER START” trip odometer reading is
automatically reset after four hours of electronic key not
being in steering lock position 2.
Important!
The reading in the display “TANK CONTENT” might be
off by approximately +/– 2.2 US qt (2 l). Please refuel in
time.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
The “AFTER START” display (1) always appears when
the trip computer is called up.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
107
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
108
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Malfunction message memory
1 There are no messages stored in the system.
2 Number of messages stored in the system.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
message memory (1 or 2) is displayed.
Press the j or k button if display (2) appears.
The stored malfunction messages will now be displayed
in order. See page 247 for malfunction and warning
messages.
Display (2) will reappear after you have scanned all the
fault messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Should any malfunctions be stored while driving, they
will reappear in the display (2) when the electronic key
is in steering lock position 0 or removed from the
steering lock.
Important!
Malfunctions and warning messages are only indicated
for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail.
The malfunction and warning messages are simply a
reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages. See page 247.
Specific malfunctions can be recalled by pressing
button J. Each malfunction or warning message must
be acknowledged by pressing button J. Once all
messages are cancelled the odometer display should
reappear.
Pressing the J button in the instrument cluster
immediately switches to the next malfunction message.
The malfunction message memory will be cleared when
the electronic key is turned in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2. Should subsequent malfunctions occur,
they will be displayed in the malfunction message
memory.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
109
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
110
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Individual settings
R
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
8 “STATION SEARCH USING” — radio adjustment
2 “SET TIME – HOURS”
“FREQUENCY” – use the j or k button to
select a frequency
(only vehicles without COMAND)
“MEMORY” – use the j or k button to select
a stored station (preset memory)
3 “SET TIME – MINUTES”
(only vehicles without COMAND)
9 See page 113 for instructions on returning the
4 “12/24 O’CLOCK”, the unit set is displayed in the
instrument cluster
setting menus to the factory settings
(only vehicles without COMAND)
10 Selection marker – indicates the setting selected
5 “TEMP. INDICATOR” — the unit set is displayed in
the outside temperature display in the instrument
cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display
Notes:
These settings may only be performed with the vehicle
at standstill and with the key in steering lock position 1
or 2.
6 “DISPLAY VALUES IN” – the unit set is displayed in
the trip and main odometer.
The figure depicts the factory setting for the Federal
Republic of Germany.
7 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the
multifunction display
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
111
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
112
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
Notes:
individual setting preliminary display (1) appear.
Settings can only be selected with the vehicle stationary
or moving slowly.
Press the j or k button until the required setting
menu (2 to 8) is displayed.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear if you speed up.
Pressing the æ or ç button sets the time in
setting menus (2, 3) and controls the selection marker
in setting menus (4 to 8).
The setting menu previously called up will reappear
when the vehicle stops or slows down, providing no
other system has been called up in the meantime.
The settings made are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return setting menus (4 to 8) to their factory settings:
Setting the audio volume
You can only adjust the volume of the system currently
in use. The volume setting for each system (audio,
telephone, navigation and voice recognition system) is
stored separately.
• Call up the individual setting preliminary
display (1).
• Press the J button in the instrument cluster for
approximately 3 seconds. Display (9) will appear.
Setting button:
• Press the J button once more, the message
“RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS” appears in the
display.
æ increases the volume.
ç reduces the volume.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear if you do not press the J button within
about 5 seconds. The setting menus will not be
reset.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
113
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
114
Car care
Index
Flexible service system
Flexible service system (FSS)
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds
when turning the electronic key in steering lock to
position 2, or while driving when reaching the service
warning threshold.
(service indicator)
The symbols and messages indicate the type of service
to be performed:
9 Service A
½ Service B
10
One of the following messages will appear in the display
(e.g. Service A):
“SERVICE A – IN xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – DUE NOW”
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is
directly related to the operating conditions of the
vehicle.
The next service due date is displayed either in days or
in miles, depending on your driving style.
The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a
message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next
suggested service.
Once the suggested service term has passed, the symbol
and message appear for approximately 30 seconds and
a signal sounds every time when turning the electronic
key in steering lock to position 2.
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year,
the next service is calculated and displayed in days or
distance remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The service indicator disappears automatically after
30 seconds or if button J on the instrument cluster is
pressed.
Note:
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such
days not counted by the FSS can be added by your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Calling up service indicator manually:
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 1.
The interval between services is determined by the type
of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example,
driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined
with short distance driving in which the engine does not
reach operating normal temperature, reduce the interval
between services.
Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by
pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel until the display appears. See page 96.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Important!
The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator.
See page 117 for engine oil level indicator.
Flexible service system
115
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
116
Car care
Index
Flexible service system
Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz
Center sets the counter mileage to 10 000 miles
(Canada: 15 000 km) and 365 days.
The multifunction display will show the question:
“DO YOU WANT TO RESET – SERVICE INTERVAL? –
CONFIRM BY – PRESSING R”
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
Press button J on the instrument cluster again, and
hold until a signal sounds. The message “SERVICE
INTERVAL HAS BEEN RESET” appears in the
multifunction display.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 96.
The new service indicator is displayed with the reset
distance of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km).
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Press button J on the instrument cluster for
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.
approximately 2 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil level indicator
Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 96.
Press button j or k on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the “MEASUREMENT
CORRECT – ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL” engine oil level
indicator appears. This indicator is only a reminder.
Measurement can be cancelled by pressing button j
or k if the vehicle is not parked on level ground. An
incorrect reading will be recorded if you do not cancel
the measurement. Move the vehicle to level ground and
measure again.
The electronic key in steering lock is not in position 2 if
the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – SWITCH ON IGNITION”
message appears.
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – MEASURING NOW”
message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds.
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping
the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan.
Engine oil level indicator
117
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
118
Car care
Index
Engine oil level indicator
One of the following messages will subsequently appear
on the indicator:
Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick, if it
cannot be completed via the multifunction display.
See page 268.
In this case we recommend that you have the system
checked at a Mercedes-Benz Center.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.”
No oil needs to be added.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART”
(Canada: 1.0 L)
Note:
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART”
(Canada: 1.5 L)
See malfunction and warning messages on page 247
and page 258 if an engine oil level indicator appears on
the multifunction display when the engine is running.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART”
(Canada: 2.0 L)
The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine
is running. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN
ENGINE ON” message will appear.
See page 268 for instructions on adding engine oil.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL”
Do not overfill the engine.
Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could
cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil consumption
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in
increased consumption.
The message “PERF. SERV. ON TIME” (perform service
[engine oil level check] on time) will be displayed if a
proper oil level check cannot be performed. The engine
oil level check can be repeated after a short time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior lamp switch
B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam
headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)
‡ Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green
indicator in lamp switch comes on.
† Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in
addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in
lamp switch comes on.
Standing lamps
When the vehicle is parked on the street the standing
lamps (right or left side parking lamps) can be turned
on, making the vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.
D Off
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,
licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)
The standing lamps cannot be operated with the
electronic key in steering lock position 2.
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low
beam is additionally switched on.
Exterior lamp switch
119
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
120
Car care
Index
Exterior lamp switch
Note:
Daytime running lamps
(Canada only)
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door
open, a warning sounds and the message “SWITCH OFF
LIGHTS” in the multifunction indicator appears if the
vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not
switched off.
When the engine is running and the selector lever is in
a driving position, the low beam headlamps (includes
parking lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps and
license plate lamps) are automatically switched on.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or
the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult
your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding allowable lamp operation.
When shifting from a driving position to position “N”
or “P”, the low beam switches off (2 seconds delay).
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should
be turned to position B to permit activation of the
high beam headlamps.
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the
exterior lamp switch is turned to position D.
Night security Illumination
When exiting the vehicle after driving with the exterior
lamps on, they switch on again for added illumination
for approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.
The lamp-on time period can be changed at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp cleaning system (optional)
The switch is located in the center console.
The headlamp washer can be activated with the
electronic key in steering lock position 2.
Briefly press symbol side of switch.
P82.15-2007-26
Headlamp cleaning system
121
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
122
Car care
Index
Combination switch
Combination switch
3 High beam flasher (high beam available
independent of exterior lamp switch position)
4 Turn signals, right
4
5 Turn signals, left
4
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing
lanes on a highway, move combination switch to the
point of resistance only and hold it there.
3
1
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the
combination switch past the point of resistance (up or
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.
2
5
5
Turn signal failure
If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator
system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate.
1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B)
2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
I
Wiper off
Intermittent wiping
Vehicles with optional rain sensor:
One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are
automatically controlled by a rain sensor
monitoring the wetness of the windshield.
Notes:
With switch in this position, one wipe occurs
when turning the electronic key in steering lock
from position 0.
P54.25-2423-26
Optional rain sensor:
Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle
is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wiper will operate in
presence of water spray at windshield, and wiper
may be damaged as a result.
6 Control for windshield wiper/washer system:
Push briefly for single wipe without adding washer
fluid (use only when windshield is wet).
Push past detent and hold to activate wiper and
washer.
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
7 Windshield wiper
Combination switch
123
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
124
Car care
Index
Rear window wiper/washer
Note:
Rear window wiper/washer
The windshield washer reservoir, hoses and nozzles are
automatically heated.
For windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio,
see page 271
1
2
Windshield wiper smears
If the windshield wiper smears the windshield, even
during rain, activate the washer system as often as
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be
mixed in the correct ratio.
Blocked windshield wiper
1 Press for interval wiping, indicator lamp comes on.
If the windshield wiper becomes blocked (for example,
due to snow), switch off the wiper.
Press again to switch off, indicator lamp goes out.
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove
electronic key from steering lock. Remove blockage.
2 Press and hold for simultaneous operation of wiper
and washer
Activate combination switch again (electronic key in
steering lock position 1).
The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if
the windshield wiper is engaged and the gear selector
lever is placed in “R” Reverse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard warning flasher switch
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the
switch located in the dashboard.
To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.
To deactivate, press switch again.
Note:
With the hazard warning flasher activated, the
combination switch in position for either left or right
turn, and the electronic main key in steering lock
position 2, only the respective left or right side turn
signals will operate.
Hazard warning flasher
125
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
126
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
5
4
3
2
3
1
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Air volume control for center air outlets, turn wheel
The system is always at operational readiness, except
when manually switched off.
up to open.
The automatic climate control only operates with the
engine running.
2 Air volume control for side air outlet and side
window defroster outlet.
The temperature selector should be left at the desired
temperature setting. The temperature selected is
reached as quickly as possible.
To open side air outlets:
Turn wheel to position i.
To open defroster outlets:
Turn wheel to position l.
The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a
higher or lower temperature.
3 Center air outlets, adjustable
4 Side air outlet, adjustable
5 Side defroster outlet
The automatic climate control removes considerable
moisture from the air during operation in the cooling
mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground
through ducts in the underbody.
6 Display and Controls
The desired interior temperature can be selected
separately for the left and right side of the passenger
compartment.
Automatic climate control
127
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
128
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Display and controls
Press the desired button to activate, indicator lamp is on
while activated.
U Automatic mode
f Raise temperature
g Lower temperature
P Defrost
O Air recirculation
e Activated charcoal filter
F Rear window defroster
b Air distribution, manual
S Economy mode
0
MAX
P83.40-2167-26
ï Air volume, manual
T Residual engine heat utilization
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic setting - Automatic mode
Special settings
(use only for short duration)
Press left and right U button for automatic mode.
Defogging windows
Simultaneously press both f and g buttons for
temperature setting of 72°F.
Switch off O button.
Press left and right U buttons.
Q
Press b button repeatedly until air is directed
upward.
Air volume and distribution are controlled
automatically.
This setting can be used all year around.
S
Turn wheels (2) to position to open left and right
defroster outlets (5).
Economy
Defrosting
The function of this setting corresponds to the
automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning
compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not
possible to air condition in this setting.
Turn wheels (2) to position l to open left and right
defroster outlets (5).
Press P button. Maximum heated and automatically
controlled amount of air is directed to the windshield
and side windows.
Press S button to activate.
Press S button once again to return to previous
setting.
P
Press P button once again to return to previous
setting.
Automatic climate control
129
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
130
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Rear window defroster
Air distribution
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2.
To select, press F button.
U
requested symbol is displayed.
Press b button for each side repeatedly until the
To cancel, press F button again.
Notes:
Air volume
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed
before activating the defroster.
Press - or + side of rocker switch ï until the
requested blower speed is attained. A choice of 7 blower
speeds is available.
The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power.
To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the
defroster as soon as the window is clear.
To switch the automatic climate control off, press - side
of rocker switch ï until symbol OFF is displayed.
The defroster is automatically turned off after a
maximum of 12 minutes of operation.
I
If several power consumers are turned on
The fresh air supply to the car interior is shut off.
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,
it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn
itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside
the switch starts blinking.
While driving, use this setting only temporarily,
otherwise the windshield could fog up.
To switch the automatic climate control on again, press
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
defroster automatically turns itself back on.
U, P, or + side of ï.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air recirculation
Dust filter
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the
entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle’s
interior.
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out
before outside air enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
Outside air is not supplied to the car’s interior.
To select, press O button.
Notes:
Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air
flow through exhaust slots below the rear window.
To cancel, press O button again.
The system will automatically switch from recirculated
air to fresh air
Also keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free
of snow and debris.
• after approximately 5 minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 40°F (5°C),
• after approximately 30 minutes, at outside
temperatures above approximately 40°F (5°C),
• after approximately 5 minutes, if button S is
pressed.
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch
from recirculated air back to fresh air.
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically
engages the recirculated air mode thereby increasing
the cooling capacity performance, switching to partially
fresh air within 20 minutes.
Automatic climate control
131
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
132
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Activated charcoal filter
Residual engine heat utilization
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors
and removes pollutants from the air entering the
passenger compartment.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue
heating the interior for a short while.
Air volume and distribution are controlled
automatically.
To select, press e button.
To cancel, press e button again.
To select:
The blower speed is slightly increased to supply a
constant volume of air.
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 0 or
remove electronic key. Close air outlet in rear passenger
compartment.
The system switches automatically to the air
recirculation mode, if the carbon monoxide (CO) or
nitric oxide (NOX) of the outside air increases beyond a
predetermined level.
Press T button.
This function selection will not activate if the battery
charge level is insufficient.
When pressing button P or S, the filter is also
switched off.
To cancel:
Notes:
Press T button.
The automatic air recirculation does not function when
selecting the Economy mode S, or the outside
temperature is below 45°F (7°C).
The system will automatically shut off
• If you turn electronic key in steering lock to
position 2,
The activated charcoal filter should be switched off
when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger
compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
• after approximately 30 minutes,
• if the battery voltage drops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front center console
Note:
compartment ventilation
The compartment can get very warm due to its confined
space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the
compartment, close the air outlet while heating the
passenger compartment.
The front center console compartment has its own air
outlet.
To open:
Push lever down.
Also, do not obstruct the air outlet.
To close:
Push lever up.
The air volume is dependent on the setting of the
• air volume control
• air distribution control
• air outlets in the dashboard and rear passenger
compartment.
The air temperature is about the same as that of the
dashboard air outlets. It cannot be regulated separately.
Automatic climate control
133
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
134
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlet
Important
This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner system
that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected
in a recovery system for recycling.
1
P68.00-2136-26
To open air outlet, rotate wheel (1) upward.
The air outlet is adjustable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation – audio and telephone
Operating safety
Warning!
These instructions are intended to help you become
acquainted with your Mercedes- Benz car radio. They
contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user
functions.
Any alternations made to electronic components
can cause malfunctions
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer 1 and
telephone 1 are interconnected. Therefore, when
one of the components is defective or has not been
removed/replaced properly this may impair the
function of other components.
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an
accident, system settings should be entered with
the vehicle at standstill and systems should be
operated by the driver only when traffic conditions
permit. Always pay full attention to traffic
conditions first before operating system controls
while driving.
These malfunctions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service work or
alternations on electronic components done in an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
1
Optional equipment
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
The right to correct errors and make technical amendments is
reserved.
Audio system
135
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
136
Car care
Index
Audio system
Operating and display elements
1 On/off, volume, see page 139
6 CD mode selector, see page 148
7 Display panel, see page 143
8 Alpha-numeric keypad for
2 Telephone mode selector, see page 151
3 Seek, see page 141, 145 and 149
4 Radio mode selector, see page 141
station storage and frequency entry, see page 142
CD/Track access, see page 148 and 150
optional telephone, see page 151
5 Tune, see page 141 and 142
Fast forward/reverse, see page 145 and 149
9 Function button, see page 142 and 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Soft keys for
radio band selection, see page 141
tone controls, see page 139
scan, see page 142
Tape eject, see page 144
Tape track select, see page 144
Dolby, see page 146
CD random/repeat, see page 150
11 Tape mode selector, see page 143
Antitheft system
If the power supply to the
radio has been
interrupted,“CODE” will
appear on the display when it
The code number is shown on the Radio code card,
supplied with the radio.
is next switched on. The radio
will only work after the five-digit code has been entered
using the buttons on the right-hand control panel.
Important!
Never leave the Radio code card in the vehicle. Keep it in
a safe place.
Audio system
137
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
138
Car care
Index
Audio system
Entering the code number
Button and soft key operation
Switch on the radio.“CODE” will appear on the display.
Using the buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad, enter
the five digit code. Confirm by pressing the “OK” key.
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right
side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of
the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four
keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys”.
If an incorrect code has been entered and confirmed,
“CODE” will reappear on the display. The correct code
must be entered once again.
Note:
Do not press directly on the radio display face.
If an incorrect code is entered
three times, “WAIT” will
appear on the display and the
radio will be locked out for
about 10 minutes.
Note:
The lock out time will only count down if the radio is left
switched on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Audio functions
The AUD key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and
treble are stored separately for the cassette and CD
modes. Tone level settings are identified by the vertical
bars. The center (flat) setting is shown by one longer bar
in the center of the display.
Switching on and off
Press the control knob
.
The radio is switched off when the ignition key is turned
to position 0 or removed from the ignition. The radio is
switched on again when the ignition key is turned to
position 1 or 2.
Bass
Note:
Press the AUD key repeatedly
until “BASS” appears in the
display.
The radio can also be switched on even if the ignition
key is not inserted, but will switch itself off
automatically after one hour to conserve vehicle battery
power.
Treble
Adjusting the volume
Press the AUD key repeatedly
until “TREBLE” appears in the
display.
Turn the control knob - turning the knob clockwise will
increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the
volume.
Press the “+” key to increase
or the “-” key to decrease the level.
Audio system
139
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
140
Car care
Index
Audio system
Fader 1
Centering all audio functions
Press the AUD key repeatedly
until “FADER” appears on the
display. Press the “R” key to
move the sound to the rear
speakers or the “F” key to
Push and hold down the
“AUD” key. All audio
functions (bass, treble,
balance and fader) are set to
center or flat positions, and
move the sound to the front speakers.
the volume is adjusted to a pre-set level.
Balance
Press the AUD key repeatedly
until “BALANCE” appears in
the display.
Press the “L” key to move the
sound to the left speaker or the “R” key to move the
sound to the right speaker.
1
not available on all models
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio mode
Manual tuning
Press either the
or
Selecting radio mode
button. Step-by-step tuning in
ascending or descending
order of frequency will take
place.
Press
button.
Selecting the band
The first three tuning steps will take place without
muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed
tuning will take place until the button is released.
The following tuning intervals will be shown on the
display:
Press the key located below
the desired band. The band
selected is shown in the top
line of the display.
FM
AM
WB
200 kHz
10 kHz
Channels 1-7
Frequency ranges:
FM
87.9 - 107.9 MHz
530 - 1710 kHz
approx. 162 MHz
AM
WB
Seek tuning
Press either the
or
button. The radio will tune
to the next receivable station.
Audio system
141
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
142
Car care
Index
Audio system
Scan tuning
Storing stations
Press the SC key. Each strong
receivable station on the band
selected will be tuned in for
8 seconds. The first scan will
tune only the stations with a
Hold the number button down for approximately
2 seconds. The currently displayed frequency is stored
on the selected station button. The storage procedure is
confirmed by a short signal tone.
high signal strength. The second scan will tune every
receivable station. By pressing either the
or buttons, or the “SC” key the scan mode
Retrieving a station from memory
,
,
Press the desired station button.
can be cancelled.
Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)
Station memory
Select the band. Press the
“ button and enter the
desired frequency using the
alpha-numeric keypad.
Frequencies outside of the
Ten stations can be stored in
the AM and FM bands via the
alpha-numeric keypad. The
“0” button corresponds to
location 10. Weatherband
frequency ranges (frequencies specified on page 141)
will not be accepted. The frequency input mode is
cancelled if no button is pressed within 4 seconds.
(WB) channels 1 to 7 can be retrieved via the alpha-
numeric keypad and are preset at the factory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cassette mode
Playing cassettes
Press the “TAPE” button. When the eject (EJ) key is
pressed, the display folds down and the cassette slot
becomes visible. Push the cassette into the slot until it
engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.
Note:
Vehicles equipped with the COMAND system do not
come with a factory installed cassette mechanism.
A standard 1/8” stereo phono plug for auxiliary audio
input (located in glove box) is provided for connection of
a portable battery operated cassette player or any other
portable device which uses a headphone output. Please
refer to the COMAND operating manual for information
concerning the activation of the audio input.
Notes:
Do not press directly on the radio display face.
Return the display panel to its normal position by
folding it back up and pressing gently on the display
frame to lock in place.
When playing mono recorded tapes (e.g. books) through
a stereo system the sound from one track might bleed to
the other track, despite setting the balance to the full
left or full right speakers.
Audio system
143
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
144
Car care
Index
Audio system
Important!
Cassette eject
If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
Press the eject (EJ) key. The display will fold down and
the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then
fold the display back up manually. The radio will switch
back to radio mode automatically.
The radio will switch to
cassette mode. Track 1 will be
played and “SIDE 1”
Note:
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is
switched off.
displayed. Track 1 is the side
of the cassette which is facing
upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the
type of tape and switch the equalization automatically.
A cassette symbol in the display indicates that a tape is
in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes but
not in cassette mode.
Important!
If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is
switched off or another mode is selected.
Track selection
If a cassette is in the
Press the track selection
(TRK) key. The current track
will be displayed as “SIDE 1”
or “SIDE 2”. The track will be
changed automatically at the
end of the tape.
mechanism, cassette mode
can be selected by using the
“TAPE” button. If no cassette
has been inserted, the display
will show “NO TAPE”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track search forwards/backwards
Fast forward/reverse
Press the
button.
Press the
button.
“SEEK FWD” will be shown on
the display and the track
search will run the tape
forwards to the start of the
next track.
“FORWARD” will appear on
the display and fast forward
will start.
Press the
button.
“REWIND” will appear on the
display and fast reverse will
start.
Press the
“SEEK RWD” will be shown
button.
on the display and the track
search will run the tape
backwards to the start of the
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same
button again, or it will stop automatically at the
beginning or the end of the tape. The track will
automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape
and play will begin.
track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted
by pressing the same button again.
Note:
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.
Audio system
145
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
146
Car care
Index
Audio system
Scanning
Dolby NR 1 (noise reduction system)
Press the “SC” key. Each track
on the cassette will be played
for 8 seconds in ascending
order.
To enable optimum
reproduction of cassettes
recorded using the Dolby B
system, press the “AUD” key
followed by the NR key so the
Note:
“NR” in the display is not highlighted. To turn off
Dolby B noise reduction, press the “NR” key so the “NR”
in the display is highlighted.
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.
1
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Scan will be interrupted if the
buttons or the “SC” key is pressed.
,
,
,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD mode
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially
available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,
etc. should be used.
General notes on CD mode
Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs
from heat and direct sunlight.
Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode,
“TEMP HIGH” will appear in the display and muting
will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio
mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe
operating level.
Warning!
The CD changer 1 is a Class 1 laser product. There
is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover
is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer 1 does not
contain any parts which can be serviced by the
user. For safety reasons, have any service work
which may be necessary performed only by
qualified personnel.
Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are
too low, “TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD will
play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving
over rough roads.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during
playback.
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the
CDs or apply any label to the CDs.
1
Optional equipment
Audio system
147
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
148
Car care
Index
Audio system
CD changer installed
Loading/emptying the CD magazine
Slide the changer door to the right and press the eject
button . The magazine will be ejected. Remove the
magazine. Pull out the CD tray until its stop is reached
and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label side up.
Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown
by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the
changer.
4
2
3
1
Important!
Close the door after the magazine has been inserted.
2
Playing CDs
Press the CD button. The CD most recently played will
start at the point where it was last switched off. CDs
stored in the magazine can be selected by using the
station preset buttons 1-6.
1 CD changer 1
2 CD magazine
3 CD tray
The magazine slot number of
the selected CD will then be
displayed after “CD”. The
number of the track being
played will be displayed after
“TRACK”.
4 CD
If a CD changer 1 is installed, it can be operated from the
front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must
be installed for CD playing.
1
Optional equipment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no CD in the
selected magazine slot,
“NO CD” and the
corresponding slot number
will be displayed
Fast forward/reverse
Press the
forward.
button and hold it down for audible fast
Press the
reverse.
button and hold it down for audible
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been
played, the next CD will automatically be selected and
played.
The search will stop when the
button is released. The
relative time of the track will
be displayed during the
search. The search mode will
cancel if the beginning or end of the CD is reached.
Skipping tracks forwards/backwards
Press the
played.
button. The next track on the CD will be
Press the
button. If the track has been playing for
Scanning
more than 10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that
track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it
will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks,
the respective button must be pressed until the desired
track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is
reached during the search, the first or last track will be
played.
Press the SC key. Each track will be played for 8 seconds
in ascending order. The search will stop at the track in
question if the
,
,
,
buttons or the
“SC” key is pressed.
Audio system
149
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
150
Car care
Index
Audio system
Random play/repeat function
Direct track selection
The tracks of the current CD are played in random order
when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the
RDM key to switch on, and press RDM again to switch
off.
Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the
alpha-numeric keypad. Press the “ function button,
followed by the track number.
When the repeat function
(RPT) has been selected, a
particular track can be played
for as many times as desired.
Press the RPT key to switch
on, and press RPT again to switch off.
Note:
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telephone operation
Entering telephone number and starting dialing
process
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated
cellular telephone 1 can be performed and displayed via
the car radio. Further instructions for operating the car
telephone can be found in the operation guide for the
cellular telephone 1.
Enter the desired telephone
number using the alpha-
numeric keypad. The number
can have up to 32 digits, but
only 13 of these can be
displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the
SND button. The entered number can be corrected using
the “CLR” key.
Switching the telephone on and off
Switching on: Press the
button, “TEL” appears in the
corner of the display.
Press the CLR key briefly -
and the last digit will be
deleted.
Switching off: Press and hold
button until the telephone symbol “TEL” no
the
Press the CLR key longer - and
the complete number will be deleted.
longer appears in the display, or press the “PWR” button
on the phone’s keypad.
1
Optional equipment
Calling up the phone book
The numbers stored in the telephone memory can be
called up via either name or number entries. The
memory contents from the portable phone must be
downloaded and the telephone menu must be selected
in order to call up the phone book. Refer to the
“Memory download” section of the cellular telephone
operation guide for more information.
Audio system
151
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
152
Car care
Index
Audio system
Switching between name search and number search
Press ABC key - Name search
Placing a call
When a number or a name
has been selected using the
method described above,
press the SND key.
Press NUM key - Number search
Searching and selecting phone book entries by name
Press the ABC key. The current name is shown on the
display. The stored entries in alphabetical order can be
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing
the SND key once and the call can be placed by pressing
the SND key a second time. The last dialed telephone
number is shown on the display. Using the
or button, the numbers stored in the re-dial
memory of the telephone can be selected.
selected using the
or
button. By pressing the
or buttons, the stored entries can be selected
according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam,
B-Brown, M-Miller).
,
,
Searching and selecting phone book entries by
number
The abbreviation L and the
number in the memory are
shown in the top line of the
display.
Press the NUM key. The current number is shown on
the display. The stored entries can be selected in
numerical order using the
pressing the or
or
button. By
buttons, the stored entries
can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2,
Entry no. 7, etc.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accepting incoming call in telephone mode
Component malfunctions
With an incoming call, the ringing tone will be heard
and the message “CALL” appears in the display. Press
the SND key to answer the call.
The radio, CD changer 1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated
cellular telephone 1 are part of a fiberoptic networked
system. Failure of one of the components can lead to
malfunctions of the other components. Please contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes for more information in the event
of a malfunction.
Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background
(telephone symbol in the display), then a switch is made
automatically to telephone when an incoming call is
received. The audio source is muted, the ringing tone is
heard and the message “CALL” appears. After the call
has been terminated, the previously selected audio
source is resumed.
1
Optional equipment
Terminating call
A current call can be terminated by pressing the END
key.
Audio system
153
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
154
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Power windows
1
3
4
5
2
P54.25-2119-26
Power window switches located on center console
Switches for:
Power window switches located in rear doors
6 Individual switches (rear doors)
1 left, front
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
Press switch in to resistance point:
k to open
2 left, rear
3 right, front
4 right, rear
j to close
5 Switch for rear door window override
Release switch when window is in desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express opening and closing
Blocking of rear door window operation
If no operation of the rear windows by switch (6) (for
instance by children) is desired, slide override
switch (5) to right, symbol N becomes visible.
Press switch k or j past resistance point and
release — window opens or closes completely.
To interrupt procedure, briefly press k or j.
If the upward movement of the window is blocked
during the closing procedure, the window will stop
during the last few inches before closure and open
slightly.
Warning!
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
When pressing and holding the switch j to close the
window, and upward movement of the window is
blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will
stop but not open slightly.
In case of obstruction, the automatic reversal will
not operate if a window is being closed by pressing
the switch to its resistance point and holding it
there, or when using the remote control.
The closing procedure can be immediately reversed
by either pressing the switch k, or pressing
button Πon the remote control, and holding it.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.
Note:
The power windows can also be opened or closed with
the electronic main key while unlocking or locking the
vehicle doors, see page 32.
Interior equipment
155
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
156
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Synchronizing power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof (optional)
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or low), the windows cannot be opened or
closed by the Express feature.
1
To resynchronize the express feature, press j side of
power window switch until the window is completely
closed and hold for additional 2 seconds. Repeat
procedure for each window.
3
The automatic full opening and closing procedure of the
windows should now be restored.
2
4
P68.00-2100-26
1 to slide roof open
Push to open half-way, push again to open fully.
2 to slide roof closed
3 to raise roof at rear
4 to lower roof at rear
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof:
Move switch to resistance point in the required
direction.
Release the switch when the roof has reached the
required position.
The switch is illuminated when the exterior lamps are
switched on (except standing lamps).
Warning!
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing procedure can be immediately reversed
by either moving the switch in direction (1) or (3),
or pressing button Πon the remote control, and
holding it.
With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid
into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When
sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.
Interior equipment
157
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
158
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Express opening of sliding/pop-up roof
Synchronizing sliding/pop-up roof
Move switch past resistance point and release — the
sliding/pop-up roof slides open half-way. Move again to
open fully.
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or low), or if the sliding/pop-up roof is
blocked during closing/opening procedure, the system
has to be synchronized.
To interrupt procedure, briefly move switch in any
direction.
To do so, turn electronic key in steering lock to
position 2, move and hold switch in direction (3) until
the sliding/pop-up roof is completely raised at rear, and
hold for additional 1 second.
Notes:
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see
page 301.
The sliding/pop-up roof can also be opened or closed
with the electronic main key while unlocking or locking
the vehicle doors, see page 32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior lighting
2 Press to switch interior and reading lamps on or off.
3 Press to switch rear passenger compartment lamp
(including reading lamps) on or off.
4 Press to switch reading lamp on or off.
Notes:
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,
with reading lamps switched on manually and
electronic key in steering lock position 0 or removed,
the reading lamps go out after approximately 30
minutes.
Entrance lamps, exit lamps in doors
The lamps are switched on and off by the door contact
switches.
1 Automatic interior lighting
Press once and the interior lighting is activated.
Notes:
Interiors lamps are switched on, and off (soft fade)
delayed, when unlocking or locking the vehicle, or
when opening or closing a door. However, there will
be no (soft fade) delay when the electronic key is in
steering lock position 2.
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,
with doors open all interior lamps go out after
approximately 5 minutes.
Press again and interior lamps remain switched off,
even when centrally unlocking or opening a door.
Interior equipment
159
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
160
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Sun visors
Illuminated vanity mirrors
P68.00-2430-26
P68.60-2026-26
Swing sun visors down to protect against sun glare.
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting, the lamp
is switched on by opening the cover.
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage
visor from inner mounting, pivot to the side and slide it
to the desired position.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
The lamp goes out automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior
Warning
Cup holder in rear bench armrest
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Armrest, rear bench
P91.27-2005-26
Pull down the armrest by its top.
Press button (1) and pull out drawer to its detent.
Caution!
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot
liquids.
Interior equipment
161
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
162
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Glove box
Cup holder and coin holder in glove box lid
P68.10-2383-26
1 Unlocking: Turn mechanical key to vertical position
Caution!
and remove.
Keep glove box lid closed while traveling. Place only
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
2 Locking: Turn mechanical key to the right and
remove.
3 Opening: Pull on handle.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the
mechanical key. See page 25 for instructions on how to
remove the mechanical key from the electronic main
key (e.g. for valet parking service).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage compartment above ashtray
in center console
Storage compartments in center console
P68.20-2260-26
To open:
To open compartment in armrest:
Lift lid with handle (4).
Touch bottom of cover slightly. The cover opens
automatically.
To open compartment under armrest:
Lift lid with handle (5).
To close:
Lower lid until it engages in lock.
Interior equipment
163
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
164
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Cup holder in center console
Note:
The right claw is adjustable to accommodate most
container sizes.
An additional second (smaller size) container can be
placed in the cup holder.
Spilling liquids (e.g. soda or coffee) could restrict the
movement of the claw. Refer to page 312 for cleaning the
cup holder.
Caution!
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot
liquids.
To open cover:
Touch top of cover (6) slightly. The cover opens
automatically.
Warning!
To open cup holder:
Briefly press button (7). The cup holder opens
automatically.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to
prevent stored objects from being thrown about
and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident
and sudden maneuver
To store cup holder:
Push button (7) down until cup holder engages. Close
cover (6).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtrays
To remove ashtray:
Push sliding knob (1) toward the right to eject the
insert.
Center console, front
To install ashtray:
Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to
engage.
Warning!
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”,
turn off the engine and set the parking brake.
Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of
unintended contact with the gear selector lever.
By touching the bottom of the cover lightly, the ashtray
opens automatically. Prior to removing the ashtray
insert, move the gear selector lever to position “N”.
Interior equipment
165
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
166
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Rear doors
To remove ashtray:
Push left and right sides down and pull out the ashtray.
To install ashtray:
Install top of ashtray, push bottom part in to engage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter
Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of the
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate
electrical accessories up to maximum 85 W.
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.
Push in lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when
hot.
Interior equipment
167
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
168
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Split rear bench seat
3. Pull head restraint up to its highest position.
Depress the release button (3) until it engages and
pull out the head restraint.
The two sections can be folded down separately to
enlarge the cargo area.
1. Slip seat belt webbing behind belt retainer (1) and
move buckle latch plate upward to belt outlet.
4. Insert head restraint into the openings provided in
the seat cushion.
2. Slip fingers into recess (2) and lift seat cushion to a
vertical position (move front seat forward a little, if
necessary).
5. Pull locking handle (4) up and fold backrest forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
P91.12-2050-26
P91.12-2199-26
Set up:
Warning!
Pull backrest up until it locks in its upright position.
A red indicator (5) on the pull locking handle is visible
in the unlocked position. Check for secure locking by
pushing and pulling on the backrest. Follow remaining
steps in reverse order listed above.
Do not drive the vehicle without head restraints.
Always reinstall head restraints when returning
cushions to seating use. Head restraints help
reduce injuries should an accident occur.
Note:
Do not interchange the front head restraints with the
rear head restraints.
Interior equipment
169
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
170
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Folding the backrest forward:
When folding the backrest forward, the hinge pins (7)
must rest in the brackets at the backrest. It is not
necessary to remove the head restraints before folding
the backrest forward if the seat cushion has been
removed.
7
When reinstalling the seat cushion, be sure to lock the
respective seat cushion into its hinge pins (7).
6
7
In addition, when transporting extremely long items,
push front passenger seat forward, remove its head
restraint and lower its backrest to the rear.
P91.12-2200-26
Notes:
Enlarging cargo area:
It must be ensured that the heating elements of the rear
window defroster are not damaged by cargo rubbing
against them.
The cargo area can be enlarged by placing the seat
cushions in a vertical position and removing them. To
remove each seat cushion, pull up the lever (6) on the
underside of the seat and pull the seat cushion out its
hinge pins (7).
With twin-reel roller installed: When folding the
backrest down, fold the right section first and then the
left section. If only the left section is to be folded, first
remove the twin-reel roller blind, see page 171.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retractable luggage cover and partition net
Warning!
The twin-reel roller blind comprises a luggage cover and
a partition net. It is mounted on the backrest of the rear
seat and can also be used with the backrest folded
down.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
Always lock backrest in its upright position when
rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo
area is not in use. Check for secure locking by
pushing and pulling on the backrest.
Never drive vehicle with tailgate open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Interior equipment
171
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
172
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Luggage cover:
Pull out lower blind, draw it over the luggage and
engage into track on the D pillar. When the tailgate is
opened the blind is lifted up automatically so that it
need not be retracted for loading or unloading the
vehicle.
Lower the blind to its bottom stop before closing the
tailgate.
1
To retract the lower blind, press left and right lock
button (1). The luggage cover rail is raised. Now
disengage it from the track on the D pillar and slowly
guide it into its receptacle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning!
1
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, always use partition net when
transporting cargo.
Removal of twin-reel roller blind:
Fold backrest sections forward, push cover mechanism
to the left and remove.
P68.50-2094-26
Partition net:
Pull out upper blind (safety net) and engage into eyelets
on the roof (1). This is a particularly important safety
factor when the vehicle is loaded higher than the top of
the seat backrest.
Interior equipment
173
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
174
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Rear-facing bench seat
1
1
1
P91.22-2060-26
P91.22-2061-26
The rear-facing bench seat can be unfolded to enlarge
the seating area.
Warning!
Prior to occupying the rear-facing bench seat, the
rear seat backrests must be in an upright position
and locked in place.
By pressing down on the handle, lift the backrest into
place. Raise the seat cushion in a similar manner.
To avoid possible injury to the rear-facing bench
seat occupants, the bench should be used by no
more than two passengers not taller than 5 ft.
(150 cm).
Hook the safety belts into the brackets (1) provided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cup holder next to seat
2
P91.22-2062-26
P91.22-2063-26
Note:
Fold down cup holder to open.
If the rear-facing bench seat is to be occupied, the
forward-facing split rear bench seat must be equipped
with head restraints.
Caution!
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.
To stow the rear-facing bench seat, proceed in reverse
order, pulling the seat cushion up by its strap (2).
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot
liquids.
Interior equipment
175
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
176
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Loading instructions
P68.00-2153-26
P91.40-2171.26
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle
depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore
recommended to load the vehicle according to the
illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against front or rear
seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept
as low as possible since it influences the handling
characteristics of the vehicle.
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and
luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the certification label which can be
found on the left door pillar.
For additional safety when transporting cargo while the
rear bench seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat
belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo tie-down rings
Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as
possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting
cargo.
Never drive vehicle with tailgate open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Eight rings are located in the cargo compartment.
Additional two rings can be found ahead of the split rear
bench seat on the cross member.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all
rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the
cargo.
Interior equipment
177
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
178
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Cellular telephone
A small convenience parcel net is located in the front
passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such
as road maps, mail, etc..
The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular
telephone. For further information and installation
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Warning!
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether
or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the
driver should not use the cellular telephone while
the vehicle is in motion. Stop the vehicle in a safe
location before answering or placing a call.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to
three separately controlled objects.
Note:
Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible
with the integrated opener. If you should experience
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
2
For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
1 Integrated remote control transmitter
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2 Portable remote control transmitter
Warning!
WARNING: Changes or modification not expressly
approved by party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
When programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone
being harmed by the moving door.
Garage door opener
179
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
180
Car care
Index
Garage door opener
Programming or reprogramming the integrated
remote control:
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates
successful programming of the new frequency
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,
follow steps 1 through 4.
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the
Note:
integrated remote control located on the inside rear
view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully
program the integrated remote control device to learn
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code
feature”.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-
held transmitter button and the desired integrated
remote control button. Do not release the buttons
until completing step 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rolling code programming:
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
integrated remote control transmit button. Press
and release same button a second time to complete
the training process. (Some garage door openers
may require you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.)
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these
instructions after completing the “Programming”
portion of this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and easier.)
4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the
programmed button on the integrated remote
control transmitter.
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.
Canadian programming:
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button
(note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener
motor head unit (which activated the “training
light”).
Note:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
Garage door opener
181
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
182
Car care
Index
Garage door opener
Operation of remote control:
Erasing the remote control memory:
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1
or 2.
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate
the remote controlled device. The integrated remote
control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the
control lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of
all three channels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving instructions....................... 211 Cruise control................................. 220
Driving
Drive sensibly -
Save Fuel ......................................211
Brake assist system
Control and operation of radio
transmitters ............................... 184
The first 1 000 miles
(BAS) ........................................... 223
Drinking and Driving ................211 Antilock brake system
(ABS)........................................... 225
Four wheel electronic
traction system
(4MATIC).................................... 227
Electronic stability
Pedals ...........................................211
Power assistance .........................212
Brakes ...........................................212
Driving off ....................................213
Parking .........................................213
Tires ..............................................214
Snow chains ................................216
Winter driving instructions ......217
Block heater .................................218
Deep water ...................................219
Passenger compartment ............219
Traveling abroad .........................219
(1 500 km) ................................. 185
Maintenance................................... 185
Tele Aid............................................ 186
Catalytic converter......................... 196
Emission control............................ 197
Steering lock................................... 198
Starting and turning off
the engine .................................. 200
Automatic transmission................ 201
Parking brake................................. 210
program
(ESP) ........................................... 228
Parking assist (Parktronic) .......... 232
What you should know
at the gas station....................... 237
Check regularly and
before a long trip....................... 239
Contents - Driving
183
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Car care
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Control and operation of radio transmitters
184
COMAND, radio and telephone
Telephones and two-way radio
Warning!
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being
connected to an external antenna) from inside the
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate
the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data
System), radio or telephone1 if road and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a
citizens band unit should only be used inside the
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is
installed on the outside of the vehicle.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions
regarding use of an external antenna.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)
Maintenance
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate
vehicle and engine speeds.
Approximately 30 days or 2000 miles (2000 km) prior to
the next recommended service, the remaining distance
or days are displayed in the multifunction indicator. See
Flexible service system (FSS) on page 114.
We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called
for by the FSS.
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle
driving) and excessive engine speeds.
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually
increased to the permissible maximum.
The first 1 000 miles
185
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
186
Tele Aid
Important!
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted
when using the volume control on the multifunction
steering wheel, for raising press button æ and for
lowering press button ç.
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated. If the system is not
activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays
on after turning electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 and the message “TELE AID – NOT
ACTIVATED” will be shown in the multifunction display
for approx. 10 seconds.
To activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside
Assistance button • or the Information button ¡,
depending on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call,
you will receive a user ID and password via first call
mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, Info Services* profile
and more.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
* Optional – available only with COMAND
System self-check
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
Initially, after turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and
indicated (the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not
come on). The message “TELE AID – VISIT
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the
vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not
damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
WORKSHOP” appears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The
message “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL”
appears in the multifunction display. When the
connection is established, the message “EMERGENCY
CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location system),
vehicle model, identification number and color are
generated.
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the
“SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and
in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated
constantly in red and the message “TELE AID – VISIT
WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the multifunction
display after the system self check.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
A voice connection between the Response Center and
the occupants of the vehicle will be established
automatically soon after the emergency call has been
initiated. When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –
EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
• following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,
multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt
to determine more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
• if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on
for more than 20 seconds, see pages 41 and 43.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by
opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror
labeled “SOS”, then pressing the button (for longer than
2 seconds) located under the cover. See below for
instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.
Tele Aid
187
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
188
The Tele Aid system is available if:
Warning!
• it has been activated and is operational. Activation
requires a subscription for monitoring services and
cellular air time
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is
illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message
• the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals
are available and pass the information on to the
response center.
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in
the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds.
Note:
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite
network and pass the information on to the response
center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiating an emergency call manually
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.
Press the SOS button (2) briefly (for longer than
2 seconds). The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2)
will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for
a voice connection to the Response Center.
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is
concluded.
Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will
P82.95-2209-26
automatically contact local emergency officials
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Tele Aid
189
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
190
Roadside Assistance button •
For services such as labor and/or towing charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more
information.
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside
Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The
button will flash while the call is in progress. The
message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING
CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When
the connection is established, the message “ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit
data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
These programs are only available in the USA:
• Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start,
a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire
with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
• Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher
to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle
data.
Notes:
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be
established. When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
multifunction display. The nature of the need for
assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz
Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a
qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center.
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • remains illuminated in red for approx.
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning
electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together
with the “SOS” button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check on page 186 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • is illuminated continuously and there was
no voice connection to the Response Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network
is not available). The message “ROADSIDE
A voice connection between the Client Assistance
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established. When a voice connection is
established the audio system mutes and the message
“TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
multifunction display. Information regarding the
operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is
available to you.
ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the
multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the
ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit
www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to
you separately, to learn more (USA only).
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is the
Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to
the Client Assistance Center. The button will flash while
the call is in progress. The message “INFO –
CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction
display. When the connection is established, the
message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit
data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
Notes:
The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡
remains illuminated in red for approximately
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning
electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together
with the “SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
See system self-check on page 186 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.
Tele Aid
191
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
192
If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is
illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call
(e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not
available). The message “INFO – CALL FAILED” appears
in the multifunction display.
Upgrade Signals
Tele Aid system processes calls using the following
priority.
• Automatic emergency – First priority
• Manual emergency – Second priority
• Roadside assistance – Third priority
• Information – Fourth priority
Information calls can be terminated using the
ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain
information such as vehicle identification number or
client information is not available, the operator may
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is
completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be
heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop
flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume
(only vehicles with COMAND).
Important!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after
pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in
red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault
or the service is not currently active, and may not
initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and
have the system checked or contact the Response Center
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada) as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio
system or the COMAND system audio (only vehicles
with COMAND) is muted and the selected mode (radio,
tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the
vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and
place the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will
continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only
available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND
display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system
does not reset, contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
Notes:
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until
the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Client Assistance Center
representative except Roadside Assistance and
Information calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing ì button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Tele Aid
193
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
194
Remote door unlock
Notes:
The remote door unlock feature is available if the
relevant cellular phone network is available.
In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally
(e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not
handy, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada). You will be asked to provide your password
which you provided when you completed the subscriber
agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear
in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the
door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the
vehicle occupants.
Then return to your vehicle and pull tailgate recessed
handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS”
button is flashing. The message “EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction
display.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than
20 seconds before door unlock authorization was
received by the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the tailgate recessed handle
again.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via
Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly
after the completion of your Acquaintance Call.
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with
the remote door unlocking feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO
RECEIVED - READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will
appear. Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe
location press SVC, then select “View Info Service of
mm.dd.yyyy hh.mm”. Messages will be retained for
30 minutes once the ignition is switched off.
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident
to the police who will issue a numbered incident report.
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle
is located, the Response Center will contact the local
Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will
only be provided to Law Enforcement.
Important!
Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not
function and if this occurs, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
Info Services (optional, except Canada)
(only vehicles with COMAND)
Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks,
weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be
selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FOR-
MERcedes.
Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not
illuminate during or remains illuminated after the
system self-check or if the message “TELE AID –
VISIT WORKSHOP” appears in the multifunction
display, have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
To request Info Services press the SVC button on the
COMAND system, then select “SEND NEW REQUEST
FOR INFO SERVICE”. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST
TRANSMITTED” will appear in the COMAND display
and call status messages will appear in the
multifunction display.
Tele Aid
195
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Catalytic converter
Catalytic converter
196
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type
catalytic converters, an important element in
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating
condition by following our recommended maintenance
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to
overheat, which could start a fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within permissible
limits required by law.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
lead to death.
These systems, of course, will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-
Benz authorized Center technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.
Emission control
197
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Steering lock
198
Steering lock
1 Steering is unlocked. (If necessary, move steering
wheel slightly to allow the electronic key to be
turned clockwise to position 1.)
Most electrical consumers can be operated. For
detailed information see respective subjects.
2 Driving position.
3 Starting position.
See page 200 for instructions on starting and stopping
the engine.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
P82.00-2073-26
0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position
only. The steering is locked when the electronic key
is removed from the steering lock. If necessary,
move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage. The electronic key can only
be removed with the selector lever in position “P”.
After removing the electronic key or with the
electronic key in steering lock position 0, the
selector lever is locked in position “P”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Notes:
A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened
while the electronic key is in steering lock position 1
or 0.
If the electronic key is left in the steering lock position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no longer be
turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key
from steering lock and reinsert.
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the
alternator (output) is limited.
Caution!
It is therefore recommended that you turn off
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in
stop-and-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid
draining of the battery.
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible
dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the
steering lock. Do not leave the electronic key in steering
lock position 0.
Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system
may be minimized by turning off the following power
consumers, for example:
Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the
automatic climate air volume control should be set to
the lowest position.
The steering lock can only be unlocked with the vehicle
battery properly charged and connected.
Steering lock
199
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Starting and turning off the enging
200
Starting and turning off the engine
Important!
Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the
electronic key must be turned completely to the left
before attempting to start the engine again.
Before Starting
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector
lever is in position “P” or “N”. Turn electronic key in
steering lock to position 2.
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below
-4°F (–20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater
be installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
advise you on this subject, see page 218.
Starting
Do not depress accelerator.
Turning off
Briefly turn electronic key in steering lock clockwise to
the stop and release. The starter will engage until the
engine is running.
Turn the electronic key in the steering lock to position 0
to stop the engine.
The electronic key can only be removed with the
selector lever in position “P”.
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,
turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat
starting the engine.
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission selects individual gears
automatically, dependent upon
• Selector lever position
• Program mode selector
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation
and the road characteristics.
Important!
When parking the car or before working on the vehicle
with the engine running, firmly depress the parking
brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”.
Automatic transmission
201
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Driving
202
Important!
The selector lever is automatically locked while in
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of position
“P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the service brake is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.
Accelerator position
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up
on the accelerator — the transmission shifts up again.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping
Warning!
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service
brake.
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting
to position “P”, see page 210 for parking brake.
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids
unnecessary transmission heat build up.
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
against curb.
Maneuvering
Warning!
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never
abruptly step on the accelerator.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the gear selector lever from position “P”, which
could result in an accident or serious injury.
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
slight partial throttle.
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the
ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to
come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the
malfunction indication.
Automatic transmission
203
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Selector lever position
204
Park position
The park position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.
The park position is not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always use the parking brake in
addition to placing the selector lever in park to
secure the vehicle.
Note:
The electronic key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the selector lever in
position “P”. With the electronic key removed, the
selector lever is locked in position “P”.
With a malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical
system the selector lever could remain locked in
position “P”. To unlock the selector lever
manually, see page 290.
The current selector lever position is indicated in the
gear range indicator display. The automatic gear
shifting process can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
Reverse gear
Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle
stopped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the
reverse gear is different. However, it is not
possible to change the program mode while in
reverse.
Gear selection for special circumstances
The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances
can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the
right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”.
The gear range currently selected is indicated in the
instrument cluster display.
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do
not engage “N” while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on
icy roads, see page 217 for winter driving
instructions).
Briefly press selector lever in the ç direction:
The transmission downshifts, one gear at a time, in the
order “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”.
Press and hold selector lever in the ç direction:
The selector lever position display will switch to the
gear range currently selected by the automatic
transmission.
The transmission will only shift down one gear if the
gear range currently selected has already shifted to its
highest possible gear.
Important!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in
transmission damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Briefly press selector lever in the æ direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear range
to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is
already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one
gear is possible.
Drive
The transmission automatically upshifts through
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
Automatic transmission
205
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
206
Press and hold selector lever in the æ direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear range “D”.
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever
is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per
minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will
be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches
RPM limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the service
brakes.
Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of
control.
To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best
torque range.
Important!
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”,
upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed
depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature.
This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gear ranges:
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in
mountainous regions or under extreme operating
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of
the engine’s braking power when descending
steep grades.
performance driving.
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking
power downhill.
Use this position, which makes maximum use of
the engine’s braking effect, while descending
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).
Automatic transmission
207
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Program mode selector switch
208
S
Standard mode
Press switch on symbol “S”. Use this mode for all
regular driving.
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.
Accelerator Operation:
Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly
(not into kickdown position) while driving
continuously, rather than depressing the
accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause
the automatic transmission to shift down into a
lower gear. This gear shifting process is
dependent on the current vehicle speed.
Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing
the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the
engine’s braking power during performance
driving.
The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1)
for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W”
program modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode
Emergency operation
(Limp home mode)
Press switch on symbol “W”. The vehicle starts
out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st
gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down
position.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating
in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.
The “W” mode helps to improve traction and
driving stability of the vehicle.
The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be
activated.
Caution!
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:
Never change the program mode when the selector lever
is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of
driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
Important!
Always be certain of the program mode selected since
the vehicle driving characteristics change with the
selection of the program mode.
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).
Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in
position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Automatic transmission
209
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Parking brake
210
Parking brake
To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When
the electronic key is in steering lock position 2, the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should
come on brightly.
To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument
panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster should go out.
A warning sounds, if you start to drive without having
released the parking brake.
Also see brake warning lamp on page 243.
Warning!
P42.20-2059-26
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident or serious injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving instructions
Drinking and Driving
Warning!
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving
habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs
and drive.
• keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,
• remove unnecessary loads,
• remove roof rack when not in use,
• allow engine to warm up under low load use,
• avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,
Please don‘t drink and driver take drugs or allow
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.
Pedals
• have all maintenance work performed at regular
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly
country.
Keep driver‘s foot area clear at all times. Objects
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.
Driving instructions
211
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Power assistance
212
The condition of the parking brake system is checked
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required
maintenance service.
Warning!
If the parking brake is released and the brake warning
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid
level in the reservoir is too low.
When the engine is not running, the brake and
steering systems are without power assistance.
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Brakes
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Warning!
All checks and service work on the brake system should
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After driving in heavy rain for some time without
applying the brakes or through water deep enough
to wet brake components, the first braking action
may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected
braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
from vehicles in front.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be
degraded to an extent that safe braking is
substantially impaired. This could result in an
accident.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time
to avoid an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution!
Parking
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
Warning!
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine
and leaving the vehicle, always:
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream
will cool down the brakes faster.
1. Keep right foot on the service brake pedal.
2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”.
4. Slowly release the service brake pedal.
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Driving off
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road
is clear of other traffic.
6. Turn the electronic key to steering lock
position 0 and remove.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on
the engine until the operating temperature has been
reached.
7. Take the electronic key and lock vehicle when
leaving.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Important!
It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever
parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move
selector lever to position “P”.
When parking on hills, always set the parking brake.
Driving instructions
213
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Tires
214
Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
Warning!
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These
indicators are located in six places on the tread
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is
considered worn and should be replaced.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across
the tread.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient
temperatures).
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is
always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the condition of
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to
the freezing point.
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be
substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme
caution.
Aquaplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.
We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter
season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can
reduce your stopping distance as compared with
summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is not snow or
ice covered.
Driving instructions
215
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Tire speed rating
216
Snow chains
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires,
which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.
Despite the tire rating, local speed limits should be
obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow
the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from
exceeding the speed rating.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on
roads without snow.
Warning!
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control
switch to OFF, see page 230.
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed
rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury
and possible death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter driving instructions
Warning!
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around the vehicle with engine running.
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move
selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle
under control by corrective steering action.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not
facing the wind.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done
without endangering other drivers on the road.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
Driving instructions
217
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Winter driving
218
• Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated
radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.
• Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil
which is not approved for winter operation. For
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,
see page 322.
Note:
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
antilock brake system (ABS) or electronic stability
program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated
radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.
• Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration.
• Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for below freezing
Block heater (for Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
temperatures, see page 271.
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low
ambient temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deep water
Caution!
Traveling abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas
which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz
Center directory, you should request pertinent
information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown
depth.
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as
possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Driving instructions
219
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
220
Cruise control
1 Accelerate and set:
Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to
accelerate.
2 Decelerate and set:
Depress lever briefly to set speed.
Hold lever down to decelerate.
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired
speed with the accelerator.
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be
released.
The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is
released, the previously set speed will be resumed
automatically.
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed
manner, for example over long distances, as it
automatically maintains the set speed by actively
regulating the throttle setting.
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased
slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
increments. When the lever is released, the newly
set speed remains.
Any given speed above approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by
operating the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Canceling
Important!
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to
position 3.
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the
cruise control off.
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle
speed drops below approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the
cruise control will be canceled.
Warning!
Only use the cruise control if the traffic and
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a
steady speed.
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
4 Resume
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when
driving at a speed exceeding approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise
control. The last memorized speed is canceled when
the electronic key in the steering lock is turned to
position 1 or O.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.
Driving systems
221
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
222
Notes:
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the
automatic transmission shifts down (max. to 3rd gear)
to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the
engine’s braking power.
Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control
is switched off.
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake assist system (BAS)
Warning!
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle‘s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver‘s
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped car must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum
BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system you must apply
continuous full braking power during the stopping
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Driving systems
223
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
224
The malfunction indicator lamps for the ESP are
combined with the BAS malfunction indicator lamp.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the BAS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
BAS is operational.
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in
steering lock position 2 and should go out with the
engine running.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP is also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
permanently while the engine is running, a malfunction
has been detected in either system. As a result, it is
possible that now only partial engine output will be
available, and pressing the accelerator pedal will
require more effort. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake
system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.
If a BAS warning message is displayed, have the BAS
and ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning!
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while
experiencing the pulsation.
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly
reduces braking effectiveness.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking
power and ability to steer the vehicle.
Important!
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this
manner only can the ABS be most effective.
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during
hard braking maneuvers.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even
with light brake pedal pressure because of the
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
independent of road surface conditions.
Driving systems
225
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
226
ABS control
If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated,
have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the
instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in
steering lock position 2 and should go out with the
engine running.
Warning!
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake
system functions in the usual manner, but without
antilock assistance.
For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 245.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.
Note:
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as
appropriate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
with electronic stability program (ESP)
(Model with All Wheel Drive [AWD])
Caution!
Operational tests with the engine running can only be
conducted on a 2-axle dynamometer.Otherwise the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the brakes
to the spinning wheels.
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to use available
traction, e.g. during winter operation in mountains
under snowy conditions, by applying power to all four
wheels.
If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised (see
page 288), or when testing the parking brake on a brake
test dynamometer, the engine must be shut off
(electronic key in steering lock position 0 or 1).
Important!
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:
• during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible,
• while driving, ease up on the accelerator.
If one or more wheels tend to spin, ESP will apply the
brakes to them. The traction control for the front axle
wheels deactivate at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h),
and for the rear axle wheels at approximately 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The warning lamp in the speedometer blinks at any
speed as soon as one tire loses traction.
Note:
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
4MATIC is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz
recommended M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow
chains.
Driving systems
227
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
228
Electronic stability program (ESP)
Important!
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:
Warning!
• During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• While driving ease up on the accelerator.
• Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
• Do not switch off the ESP.
Caution!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see
page 288), the engine must be shut off (electronic key in
steering lock position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will
immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel
brakes.
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving
conditions.
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the
speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer
dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the
spare wheel, must have the same tire size.
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined
with that of the BAS.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning
lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the
electronic key in steering lock position 2. They should
go out with the engine running.
When testing the parking brake on a brake test
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the
rear wheel brakes.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in either system. Only partial engine
output will be available.
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in
the usual manner, but without BAS.
Synchronizing ESP
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or empty), the BAS/ESP malfunction
indicator lamp may be illuminated with the engine
running.
If the ESP warning message is displayed, have the BAS
or ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched
off.
Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to
the right. The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
should go out.
Driving systems
229
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Driving systems
230
ESP control switch
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP
switch. The ESP warning lamp v, located in the
speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated.
Warning!
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.
ESP control switch located on center console.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
1 Press to switch ESP off
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer
dial, comes on.
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with
the switch in the OFF position.
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient
traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds
up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches
off at 50 mph (80 km/h).
2 Press to switch ESP on
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer
dial, goes out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Warning!
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ESP should not be switched off during normal
driving other than in circumstances described
above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle
stability in standard driving maneuvers.
The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
Important!
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:
• during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible,
• while driving, ease up on the accelerator.
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
ESP: press lower half (2) of the switch (the ESP warning
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).
Driving systems
231
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Parking system
232
Parking assist (Parktronic)
(optional)
Warning!
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not
intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme
care. The responsibility during parking and other
critical maneuvers rests always with the driver.
The Parktronic system assists the driver during parking
maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
Special attention must be paid to objects having
smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer
couplings, painted posts, or street curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system and can
damage the vehicle.
The front area of the vehicle is monitored when driving
forward. When reversing, the front as well as the rear
areas are monitored.
With the electronic key in steering lock position 2,
Parktronic engages automatically at speeds up to
approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and deactivates
during higher speeds.
The operational function of the Parktronic can be
affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of
snow and ice. See page 311 for notes on cleaning
the parktronic system sensors.
Parktronic can be switched off by a control switch
located in the center console. It engages automatically
again when starting the engine.
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals
(e.g. working jackhammers or the air brakes of
trucks) can cause the system to send erratic
indications, and should be taken into
consideration.
See page 236 for parktronic switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensors
A total of 10 sensors (1) monitor the vehicle’s front and
rear areas. Six sensors are located in the front bumper,
four sensors in the rear bumper.
For proper operation of the Parktronic always keep the
sensors clean, especially at times of snow and ice.
See page 311 for instructions on cleaning the sensors in
the bumpers.
1
1
1
P88.20-2049-26
1 Sensors located in bumper
(front bumper shown)
Parking system
233
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Parking system
234
Warning indicators
Visual and audible signals indicate to the driver the
relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
Warning indicators for the front area are located above
the center air outlets in the dashboard.
Warning indicators for the rear area are located in the
rear passenger compartment lamp.
1
2
1
The frames are illuminated when the Parktronic is
engaged.
2
Each warning indicator has 6 yellow and 2 red
segments.
As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle, one or more
segments light up, depending on the distance. An
intermittent acoustic warning will also sound as the
seventh segment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 3 seconds will sound for
the eighth segment.
1 Frame
2 Segments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring reach of sensors
P54.65-2299-26
P54.65-2300-26
Front bumper:
The first yellow segment lights up at these distances.
Additional segments light up as the vehicle comes
closer to the obstacle.
Center
Corner
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Minimum distance between vehicle and obstacle at
which the system stops indicating:
Rear bumper:
Front corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Front center and rear approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Center
Corner
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Parking system
235
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Parking system
236
The obstacle may not be recognized if outside the
shaded sensor field, and no longer be indicated when
approaching it any closer (warning indicators go out).
Parktronic switch
Parktronic malfunction
All red segments of the warning indicators light up, and
a warning sounds for 3 seconds, if Parktronic does not
function properly.
3
A dirty sensor could be the reason. (See page 311 for
instructions on cleaning the sensors in the bumpers.)
After cleaning the sensors, turn electronic key in
steering lock to position 2. If the defect continues to be
displayed, have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The switch is located on the center console.
1 Parktronic switched off
2 Parktronic switched on
3 Indicator lamp – comes on when Parktronic is
switched off
The parktronic system is switched on again when
turning the electronic key in starter switch position 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What you should know at the gas station
Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap
to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in
tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to
remove slowly could result in personal injury.
See page 302 for notes on fuel filler flap, manual
release.
Fuel
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully
insert filler nozzle unit. Only fill fuel tank until the filler
nozzle unit cuts out — do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating
pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon
removing the filler nozzle which could cause
personal injury.
Fuel supply
Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It
burns violently and can cause serious injury.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see
page 242 for notes on the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp.
What you should know at the gas station
237
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
What you should know at the gas station
238
Fuel tank capacity approximately 21.1 US gal (80.0 l).
This includes approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) reserve.
Tire pressure
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the
fuel filler flap.
Use premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Air conditioner
Engine oil
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, see
page 322.
Engine oil level check, see page 268.
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking
level: 2,1 US qt (2.0 l).
Bulbs
High and low beams: H7 (55 W),
low beam: Xenon (optional)
fog lamps: H1 (55 W),
Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service
Products sheet.
turn signal lamps,
Coolant
front 1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp),
parking and standing lamps, front: H 6W (6 W)
side marker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp,
turn signal lamps, rear: 21 W/24 cp,
stop, tail and parking lamp: 21 W/4 cp,
tail, parking and side marker lamp: 5 W/4 cp,
rear fog lamp, driver’s side: 21 W/32 cp,
backup lamps: 21 W/32 cp,
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water
quality).
For further information (e.g. anticorrosion/antifreeze),
see page 326.
Spark plugs
Approved spark plugs, see page 320.
license plate lamps: 5 W/4 cp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check regularly and before a long trip
1 Windshield washer system
For refilling reservoir see page 271.
2 Headlamp cleaning system
Auxiliary tank connected to windshield washer
reservoir. Open filler caps on both reservoirs during
refilling.
3
5
3 Coolant level
See “Adding coolant”, page 270.
4
4 Engine oil level
1
See “Checking engine oil level”, page 268.
2
5 Brake fluid
See “Brake fluid”, page 324.
Opening hood, see page 266.
E 320 shown
Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on
page 291.
Exterior lamp switch, see page 119.
Check regularly and before a long trip
239
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAS / ESP malfunction
indicator lamp ............................ 245
ABS malfunction
indicator lamp ............................ 245
Seat belt warning lamp .............246
Malfunction and
indicator lamp in the
center console ........................... 246
AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp ............................ 246
BRAKE FLUID .............................251
PARKING BRAKE .......................252
ENGINE FAN ...............................252
COOLANT
(coolant level) .............................253
COOLANT TEMP.
(coolant temperature) ................254
LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................255
LIGHT SENSOR ...........................256
REMOVE KEY .............................256
TELE AID .....................................257
STEERING GEAR OIL .................257
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................258
WASHER FLUID .........................259
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
Instrument cluster display
Malfunction and indicator
lamps in the
instrument cluster .................... 242
On-board
diagnostic system .......................242
Check engine malfunction
indicator lamp .............................242
Brake warning lamp ..................243
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS)
indicator lamp .............................244
Fuel reserve and fuel cap
placement warning ....................244
Electronic stability program
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............245
Malfunction and warning
messages in the
multifunction display .............. 247
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................248
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ........249
ABS-SYSTEM ..............................250
BRAKE ASSIST ...........................250
BRAKE LINING WEAR .............. 251
(Electronic stability
program) ......................................260
Contents - Instrument cluster display
Instruments
241
Instrument
Technical
Car care
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Index
and controls
cluster display
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
242
Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously
and/or the vehicle is not driving normally, serious
damage can occur to the emission system. Please
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up
during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic
key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and
replaced if necessary.
The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control
module monitors emission control components that
either provide input signals to or receive output signals
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from
interruptions or failure of any of these components are
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.
On-board diagnostic system
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when the engine is running,
CHECK
ENGINE
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management
system, emission control system, systems which impact
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you
may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we
recommend that you have the system checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
With some exceptions, the control module switches off
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists
during three consecutive cycles. See also page 244 for
fuel cap placement warning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the
passenger compartment near to the parking brake
pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes.
Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated
can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
Brake warning lamp
BRAKE
Except Canada
Note:
Canada only
If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
When the brake warning lamp and message appear
while the engine is running, this means:
• there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir
(engine running and parking brake released), or
• the parking brake is set (engine running).
Malfunction and indicator lamps
243
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
244
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp
Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning
The operational readiness of the airbag
system is verified by the indicator lamp
“SRS” in the instrument cluster when
SRS
turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 1
or 2. If no malfunction is detected, the lamp will go out
after approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out,
the system continues to monitor the components and
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a
malfunction by coming on again.
1
N54.30-2756-21
When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of
approximately 2.6 gal (10 liters).
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could result in
serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
The warning lamp blinks when the fuel cap is not
closed, or a fuel system leak has been detected.
Retighten cap and see if lamp goes out after restart and
next OBD selfcheck.
If the warning lamp continues to blink after closing the
fuel cap correctly, have the fuel system checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can
also cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see
also page 242.
See page 70 for notes on airbags, see page 69 for belt
tensioners and page 59 for infant and child seat
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp
ABS malfunction indicator lamp
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the
speedometer dial comes on with the
ABS
instrument cluster comes on with the
electronic key in steering lock position 2. It
should go out with engine running.
electronic key in steering lock position 2 and
should go out with the engine running.
See page 227 and 228 if the warning lamp lights up or
flashes when the vehicle is moving.
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and
warning in the instrument cluster remains illuminated
while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS
has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this
case, the brake system functions in the usual manner,
but without antilock assistance.
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP
is combined with that of the BAS.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the
electronic key in steering lock position 2. It should go
out with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains
illuminated with the engine running, see page 223 for
notes on brake assist system (BAS) and page 228 for
notes on electronic stability program (ESP).
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
See page 225 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).
Malfunction and indicator lamps
245
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Seat belt warning lamp
246
Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center
console
With the electronic key in steering lock
position 2, the seat belt warning lamp comes
on and a warning sounds for approximately
6 seconds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
The 7 indicator lamp will light up for approximately
6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in steering
lock to position 1 or 2.
The 7 indicator lamp stays lit as long as a
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is properly installed
on the front passenger seat. It indicates that the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
See page 67 for BabySmartTM deactivation system.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunction and warning messages in the
multifunction display
Notes:
Certain malfunction and warning messages are
accompanied by an audible signal.
Malfunction and warning messages in red are always
accompanied by an audible signal.
Malfunction and warning messages for the following
systems will be displayed immediately in the
multifunction display.
These messages can be cleared from the instrument
cluster by:
Temporary messages such as “SWITCH OFF LIGHTS”
will not be stored in the malfunction message memory.
• using the J button on the instrument cluster, or
• pressing button j, k, è or ÿ on the
Warning!
All messages contain important information which
should be taken note of and, where malfunction
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
multifunction steering wheel.
They are then stored in the malfunction message
memory. See page 108.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or result in property damage or personal
injury.
Malfunction and warning messages
247
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit)
248
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems)
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
This message is displayed to indicate that the
The displays for several systems have failed. Some
systems themselves may also have failed.
information being relayed by the engine control unit is
no longer complete. The coolant temperature gauge,
tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
This message indicates a malfunction which must be
repaired immediately.
It may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should
this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced
before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine.
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed.
Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Line 1
Line 2
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
OVERVOLTAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
CONSUMER DEFECTIVE!
Malfunction and warning messages
249
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
and controls
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
ABS-SYSTEM
250
BRAKE ASSIST
P54.30-2938-21
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
ABS-SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
BRAKE ASSIST
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
A malfunction has been detected in the system. The
brake system functions in the usual manner, but
without antilock assistance.
A malfunction has been detected in the system. The
brake system functions in the usual manner, but
without BAS.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off.
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE LINING WEAR
BRAKE FLUID
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
BRAKE LINING WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
When this message appears during braking, it indicates
that the brake pads are worn down.
Warning!
Driving with this message displayed can result in
an accident. Have your brake system checked
immediately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking
the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid
reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
Have the brake system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Malfunction and warning messages
251
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
PARKING BRAKE
252
ENGINE FAN
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE BRAKE!
ENGINE FAN
1
The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty.
Observe the coolant temperature gauge while driving, see page 90.
Parking brake, see page 210.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLANT (coolant level)
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have
the cooling system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Notes:
Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving,
see page 90.
See page 269 for instructions on topping up the coolant.
Line 1
Line 2
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You can be seriously burned.
When this message appears while driving, the coolant
level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks
are noticeable and the engine temperature does not
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station
and have coolant added to the coolant system.
The low engine coolant level warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Malfunction and warning messages
253
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
COOLANT TEMP.
254
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red
marking.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause
serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
Line 1
Line 2
COOLANT TEMP.
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious
burns and can occur just by opening the engine
hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
1
Observe the coolant temperature gauge. See page 90.
Check coolant level, see page 269.
This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this
condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing
to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to
an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
When the message appears after starting the engine, or
if it come on while driving, this indicates a failure in the
parking lamp, taillamp, stop lamp, or low beam
headlamp. See page 291 for instructions on replacing
bulbs.
If an exterior lamp fails, the message will appear only
when that lamp is switched on.
If a brake lamp fails, the message will appear when
applying the brake and stays on until the engine is
turned off.
Line 1
Line 2
Note:
LAMP DEFECTIVE
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
CHECK LAMPS!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
If additional lighting is installed (e.g. auxiliary
headlamps etc.) be certain to connect into the fuse
before the failure indicator monitoring unit order to
avoid damaging the system.
Malfunction and warning messages
255
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
and controls
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
LIGHT SENSOR
256
REMOVE KEY
P54.30-3573-21
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door
open, a warning sounds and the message “SWITCH OFF
LIGHTS!” appears in the multifunction indicator if the
vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing lamps) are not
switched off.
This message plus an audible alarm indicate that the
electronic key is in steering lock position 0 or 1, and the
driver’s door is open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELE AID
STEERING GEAR OIL
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
TELE AID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
STEERING GEAR OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
1
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic
and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. With
this message displayed, one or more functions may not be
available.
System without or with insufficient steering gear oil
level. Danger of damage to steering gear exists.
When this message appears, the steering gear oil level
has dropped below the required level. Have the system
checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
See page 186 for notes on the Tele Aid.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Malfunction and warning messages
257
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
258
3
4
There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The
engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 117.
The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.
Check the engine oil level immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 117 and check the engine for visible leakage (loss
of oil).
5
6
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
It may be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil
checked.
Line 1
Line 2
When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL”
message appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
When this occurs, the warning will first come on
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops
further.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL SENSOR
ENGINE OIL
CHECK LEVEL!1
STOP, ENGINE OFF!2
REDUCE OIL LEVEL3
VISIT WORKSHOP!4
VISIT WORKSHOP!5
VISIT WORKSHOP!6
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should be topped to
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored.
Extended driving with the symbol displayed could
result in serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1
2
The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil
level indicator on page 117.
There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WASHER FLUID
When this message appears while the engine is
running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to
approximately 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir
should be refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB
Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water or the
Concentrate and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperature, at the next opportunity. The
reservoir for the windshield and headlamp washer
systems is located in the engine compartment.
See windshield washer system on page 271 for
instructions on topping up the washer fluid.
Line 1
Line 2
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
Malfunction and warning messages
259
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
and controls
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
260
(Electronic stability program)
Line 1
Line 2
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
VISIT WORKSHOP!1, 2, 3
1
A malfunction has been detected in the system. Pressing the
accelerator pedal will require greater effort. Only partial engine
output will be available.
2
3
This message may be displayed if the power supply was
interrupted (battery disconnected or empty).
Synchronize ESP. See page 229.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare wheel, vehicle tools............ 272 Exterior lamps................................ 291
Practical hints
Vehicle jack.................................... 273
Wheels ............................................ 274
Headlamp assembly ...................292
Taillamp assemblies ..................295
First aid kit...................................... 262
Fuses................................................ 263
Electrical outlet.............................. 265
Hood................................................. 266
Checking engine oil level ............. 268
Automatic transmission
fluid level ................................... 269
Coolant level................................... 269
Adding coolant ...........................270
Windshield and headlamp
Tire replacement ........................274 Changing batteries in the
electronic main key .................. 298
Synchronizing
remote control ............................300
Emergency engine
shut-down................................... 300
Emergency operation of
sliding / pop-up roof................. 301
Manual release for
Rotating wheels .........................275
Spare wheel..................................... 276
Spare wheel bolts .......................276
Changing wheels........................... 277
Tire inflation pressure ................. 282
Battery............................................. 283
Jump starting.................................. 285
Towing the vehicle ........................ 288
Transmission selector lever,
fuel filler flap............................. 302
Replacing wiper blade insert....... 302
Roof rack ......................................... 305
washer system........................... 271
Windshield and headlamp
washer fluid mixing ratio .........271
manually unlocking ................. 290
Contents - Practical hints
261
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Car care
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
First aid kit
262
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the cargo area behind the
right hand side trim panel.
To open trim panel:
Release lock and fold down.
1
Note:
If trim panel was fully removed, make certain to insert
pins (arrows) into retainers in floor when reinstalling.
P86.10-2008-26
1 First aid kit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Before replacing a blown fuse, determine the cause of
the short circuit.
Spare fuses are supplied inside the main fuse box.
Observe amperage and color of fuse.
1
A special fuse puller is supplied with the vehicle tools.
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to
repair or bridge a blown fuse.
A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse
box cover.
P54.15-2068-26
1 Main fuses box in engine compartment
To gain access to the main fuse box (1), release clamp
(arrow), lift the fuse box cover up and remove it.
To close the main fuse box, engage right end of cover
and secure with clamp.
Fuses
263
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Fuses
264
4
P54.15-2128-26
2 Lock for auxiliary fuse box and battery cover
4 Auxiliary fuse box below right rear bench seat
3 Fuse box and battery cover
To gain access, fold seat cushion forward. Rotate lock (2)
counterclockwise and remove cover.
Note:
When reinstalling cover (3) make certain that tabs
(arrows) are inserted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical outlet
5
P82.00-2029-26
5 Auxiliary fuse box to left of exterior lamp switch
The electrical outlet is located in the rear compartment
on the left side.
To again access, open door, pry off cover and
remove.
To gain access, flip cover up. If locked, first unlock by
inserting for instance a small coin and turning it to the
left.
Note:
The cover is lockable by inserting, for instance a small
coin and turning it to the right.
Maximum capacity: 180 W.
Fuses
265
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
Hood
266
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine
compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge
indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open
the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call a fire department.
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme
caution not to catch hands or fingers.
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the
ignition system
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan
blades.
• with the engine running,
• while starting the engine,
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned
manually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P68.00-2431-26
To open:
Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open
hood (do not pull up on handle).
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel. At the same time a
handle will extend out of the radiator grill (it may be
necessary to lift the hood up slightly).
To close:
Lower hood and let it drop into lock from a height of
approximately 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed
flat on edges of hood (3).
Caution!
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.
To avoid damage to the windshield wiper or hood, open
the hood only with wiper in the parked position.
Engine compartment
267
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level
268
The engine oil level can be checked by either the oil
dipstick or via the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster.
Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil
level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after
three seconds to obtain accurate reading.
2
The oil level must be between the lower
mark (min) and the upper mark (max)
on the oil dipstick.
1
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking
level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
E 320 shown
Do not overfill the engine.
Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could
cause damage to engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 Oil dipstick
2 Oil filler cap
See malfunction and warning messages on page 258 if
an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction
display when the engine is running.
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the
oil pan.
Note:
See page 117 for engine oil level indicator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic transmission fluid level
Coolant level
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic
transmission fluid.
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is
omitted.
If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions,
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission fluid level.
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked
on level ground and the engine stopped.
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold.
The coolant level should reach the black top part of the
reservoir.
Engine compartment
269
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
Adding coolant
270
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains
hot fluid and is under pressure.
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately 1/2
turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will
be blown out under pressure.
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.
The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on
the right side of the engine block and at the bottom of
the radiator.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze, see page 326.
Warning!
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine
parts.
In order to avoid possibly serious burns:
• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking
from the cooling system, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is
overheated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and headlamp washer system
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).
For temperature below freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze.
1
2
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).
E 320 shown
1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Capacity approximately 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
2 Headlamp cleaning fluid reservoir
Auxiliary tank connected to windshield washer
reservoir. Open filler caps on both reservoirs during
refilling.
Capacity approximately 1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
Engine compartment
271
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Spare wheel
272
Spare wheel, vehicle tools
3
1 Trim panel, left side
3 Spare wheel mounting screw with handle
2 Vehicle tools
To remove spare wheel:
Remove vehicle tools. Turn spare wheel mounting screw
counterclockwise and remove.
To open trim panel:
Release lock and fold down.
To store spare wheel:
Note:
Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure with spare
wheel mounting screw. Store vehicle tools.
If trim panel was fully removed, make certain to insert
pins (arrows) into retainers in floor when reinstalling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with
jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before
working under the vehicle.
1 Jack arm
2 Jack base
The vehicle jack is stored behind the spare wheel.
See illustration for proper storage of jack.
To remove, first remove vehicle tools and spare wheel.
Then open clamp and remove vehicle jack.
Before storing the jack in the spare wheel well, the jack
arm must be lowered almost to the base of the jack.
Vehicle jack
273
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
274
Wheels
Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same designation,
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained
damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in
the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires
for summer and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Tire replacement
Front tires should be replaced in sets. Rims and tires
must be of the correct size and type. For dimensions,
see page 320.
We recommend that you break in new tires for
approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.
It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be
fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm)
whenever wheels are mounted.
For rim and tire specifications, see page 320.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rotating wheels
Notes:
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.
Rotating, however, should be carried out as
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics
and safety of the vehicle.
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove
burrs, if any.
Important!
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward
movement.
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see
page 282.
Tires, Wheels
275
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
276
Spare wheel
Important!
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward
movement.
1
2
If the arrow on tire side wall does not point in direction
of vehicle forward movement when using the spare
wheel, observe the following restrictions:
• Drive to the nearest tire repair facility as soon as
possible.
For rim and tire specifications, see page 320.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy wheel rim
2 Wheel bolt for steel spare wheel rim
Spare wheel bolts
Warning!
Note:
Wheel bolts (2) must be used when mounting steel
spare wheel rim.
Be sure to use the original length wheel bolts when
remounting the original light alloy wheel after it
has been repaired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing wheels
Warning!
Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance
from the roadway.
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning
flasher.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with
jack.
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off
engine.
3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other
axle. On a level road, place one chock in front of and
one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before
working under the vehicle.
Tires, Wheels
277
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
278
P40.10-2132-26
4. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the
wheel bolts.
5. Remove the protective cover from the jack support
tube opening by inserting the screwdriver (supplied
in the tool kit) in the opening and prying it out.
The tube openings are located directly behind the
front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel
housings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
P40.10-2133-26
P40.10-2134-26
6. Insert jack arm fully into the tube hole up to the
8. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install
alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove
the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected
from dirt and sand.
stop. Place jack on firm ground. Position the jack so
that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from
the side (see arrow), even if the vehicle is parked on
an incline.
9. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep
hands from beneath the wheels.
7. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.
Tires, Wheels
279
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
280
10. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.
Install wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and
tighten them slightly.
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub
and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
1
Unscrew the alignment bolt (1) to install the last
wheel bolt.
P40.10-2135-26
Important!
When installing steel spare wheel rim, make certain to
use the correct wheel bolts, supplied in the vehicle tool
kit, see page 276 and page 272.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or
rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
3
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired
immediately.
1
5
4
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the
correct mounting bolts.
2
P40.10-2136-26
11. Lower vehicle. Remove jack and insert jack tube
cover.
Before storing the jack, the jack arm must be
lowered almost to the base of the jack.
12. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are
tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
13. Ensure proper tire pressure.
Tires, Wheels
281
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
282
Tire inflation pressure
Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will
become somewhat harder.
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.
Important!
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating
conditions are taken into consideration.
Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)
per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage -
especially in the winter.
Example:
If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C)
and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C)
then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure
+3 psi (+0.2 bar).
An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread
separation, bulging etc.. Regular tire pressure checks
(including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than
14 days are therefore essential.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for
damage.
Battery
Warning!
The spare tire should be checked periodically for
condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become
worn over time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you
might get injured.
Warning!
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water and seek medical help if necessary.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they
are more likely to become punctured or damaged
by road debris, potholes etc.. Follow recommended
inflation pressures.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks
away from battery, avoid improper connection of
jumper cables, smoking etc..
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified
vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label
on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Important!
Battery replacement information:
The maintenance-free battery is located under the rear
seat cushion. To minimize the chance for acid leakage
which could cause severe burns during a crash or
rollover, a special acid leakage resistant battery was
factory installed. A replacement battery for the vehicle
Battery
283
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Battery
284
must not leak acid when upside down for at least
15 minutes. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center can
provide such a special battery.
operation. During removal and installation always
protect the disconnected battery positive (+) terminal
with the cover attached to the battery.
The service life of the battery is dependent on its
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length
of time.
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the
generator and other electronic components would be
damaged.
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for
long periods of time.
Note:
After reconnecting the battery also resynchronize the
front seat head restraints, the express feature of the
power windows, and the electronic stability program
(ESP), see page 46, 156 and 229.
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s
electrical circuit.
Battery recycling
Batteries contain material that can harm the
environment with improper disposal.
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and
connect last.
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.
When removing and connecting the battery, always
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the
electronic key is in steering lock position 0. The battery,
its filler caps, the vent tube and the opposite plug must
always be securely installed when the vehicle in
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of
disposal.
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old
batteries for recycling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jump starting
Warning!
Important!
A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a
frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing
personal injury.
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump
starting, you might get injured.
Jumper cable specifications:
• Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
approximately 2 AWG
• Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another
vehicle.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc..
Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump
starting with more powerful battery could damage the
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
Jump start the car by using the battery terminals located
under hood.
Jump starting
285
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Jump starting
286
Proceed as follows:
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
2. On both vehicles:
• Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.
• Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to
position “P”.
Important!
3. Lift cover (1) and clamp one end of the first jumper
cable to the positive (+) under hood terminal (2) of
the discharged battery and the other end to the
positive (+) terminal of the charged battery. Make
sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal
parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the
grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged
battery and the final connection to the negative (–)
under hood terminal (3) of the disabled vehicle.
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables
by exactly reversing the above installation
sequence, starting with the last connection made
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it
does not touch any other metal while the other end
is still attached.
Important!
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move
when the engine is started. Allow the discharged
battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of
the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.
Note:
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic
converter.
Jump starting
287
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
288
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, make certain that the electronic key is in
steering lock position 2.
If the electronic key is left in the steering lock
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the lock. In this case, the
steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key
from steering lock and reinsert.
Important!
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle
doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To remove cover:
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover
off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The
towing eye bolt is supplied with the vehicle tools. Screw
towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug
wrench.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking.
The rear towing eye is located at the right, below the
bumper.
To reinstall cover:
Engage cover (1) at bottom and press in top securely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
Note:
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning
flasher in use, turn electronic key in steering lock to
position 2 and activate combination switch for left or
right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground
and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). The electronic key must be in steering lock
position 2.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning
flasher will operate again.
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the
transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft
be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any
towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.
Caution!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (electronic key in steering lock
position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Switch off
the tow-away alarm as well as the ESP.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with
sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage
radiator and supports.
Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with
electronic key in steering lock turned to position 0.
Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to
brake and steer the vehicle.
Towing the vehicle
289
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Towing the vehicle
290
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking
To do so, insert a pin (1), e.g. ball point pen, into the
covered opening below the position “D” of the shift
pattern. While pushing the pin down, move selector
lever from position “P”.
After removal of the pin from the opening, the cover will
not close fully. Only after moving the selector lever to
positions “D+” and “D–” does the cover return to its
closed position.
In the case of power failure the transmission selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior lamps
Notes:
To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.
Replacing bulbs
Warning!
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with
the specified watt rating.
Bulbs and bulb holder can be very hot. Allow the
lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a
clean cloth.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can
explode if you:
Warning!
• touch or move it when hot,
• drop the bulb,
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
• scratch the bulb.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Exterior lamps
291
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
292
Headlamp assembly
3
5
4
2
1
1
6
P82.10-2623-26
1 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp, parking
4 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb
5 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
and standing lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulbs for low beam
H7 (55 W)
Bulbs for high beam
H7 (55 W)
Open hood.
Open hood.
Twist cover (1) counterclockwise and remove.
Pull off electrical connector (4).
Twist cover (2) counterclockwise and remove.
Pull off electrical connector.
Twist bulb holder counterclockwise and remove bulb
from it.
Twist bulb holder counterclockwise and remove bulb
from it.
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the
recess on the holder.
Insert the new bulb so that its base fits in recess of the
holder.
Install bulb holder and twist clockwise to its stop, and
reinstall electrical connector.
Install bulb holder and twist clockwise to its stop, and
reinstall electrical connector.Ensure that base is
secured on both sides (arrows)
Reinstall cover (1), twist it clockwise until seated
securely.
Reinstall cover (2), twist it clockwise until seated
securely.
Xenon (optional)
Bulb for low beam
Warning!
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
Exterior lamps
293
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
294
Turn signal lamp
1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp bulb)
Parking and standing lamp
H 6W (6 W bulb)
Open hood.
Open hood.
Twist bulb socket (3) counterclockwise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
Twist cover (2) counterclockwise and remove.
Pull off electrical connector (6).
Twist bulb socket (6) counterclockwise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket. Reinstall lamp assembly until
properly seated.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket. Reinstall lamp assembly until
properly seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamp assemblies
1
1
2
3
2
4
P82.10-2620-26
P82.10-2621-26
1 Turn signal lamp (21 W/24 cp bulb)
3 Backup lamp (21 W/32 cp bulb)
2 Stop, tail, parking and side marker lamp
4 Driver’s side:
(21/4 W bulb)
Rear fog lamp (21 W/32 cp bulb)
Exterior lamps
295
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
296
Open tailgate and left or right trim panel. Twist bulb
socket counterclockwise and pull out. Push bulb into
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
License plate lamps
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket, and close trim panel.
Notes:
Bulbs (3) and (4) cannot be accessed without removal of
tailgate trim panel.
For exchange of bulbs (1) or (2) on left side of vehicle,
also remove spare wheel, see page 272.
P82.10-2206-26
License plate lamps (5 W/4 cp bulb)
Loosen both screws, remove lamp and take out bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Side marker lamp, front
High mounted stop lamp,
Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror
The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp), and the
additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are
equipped with LEDs.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs.
Side marker lamp, front (5 W/4 cp bulb)
From inside wheel house (arrow) reach behind side
marker lamp and press tab. Remove lamp from bumper
and take out bulb.
Exterior lamps
297
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Electronic main key
298
Changing batteries in the electronic main key
2
1
3
4
P80.20-2200-26
P80.35-2028-26
1 Transmit buttons
Changing batteries
2 Lamp for battery check and function control
Move locking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and
remove mechanical key (4, left arrow).
Checking batteries
If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery
check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the
batteries are in order.
Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not
light up briefly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
8
5
4
6
P80.35-2026-26
P80.35-2027-26
Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open
latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever)
to release battery compartment.
Change batteries (7), inserting new ones under contact
spring (8) with plus (+) side facing up.
Return battery compartment into housing until locked
in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic
main key.
Remove mechanical key from side opening.
Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of
arrow (6).
Electronic main key
299
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Electronic main key
Important!
300
Emergency engine shut-down
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For
disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation
on battery package.
If the engine can no longer be stopped using the
electronic key, the engine can be turned off by removing
two fuses.
For easy removal of fuses use the fuse extractor
(supplied with vehicle tool kit) to pull out the fuses
marked on the fuse chart as “ENGINE EMERGENCY
OFF”.
Replacement Battery:
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.
The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle tool kit,
see page 272.
Synchronizing remote control
For fuses see page 263.
The remote control may have to be resynchronized, if
the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked.
To synchronize insert electronic key in starter switch.
The remote control should once again be operational.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof
1
P77.20-2037-26
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
To slide the roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear:
turn crank clockwise.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the lens
of the left interior lamp between the sun visors.
To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear:
turn crank counterclockwise.
1. Pry off lens (1) by using a screw driver.
2. Remove cover (2).
Note:
Push crank upward while turning it, to disengage the
electric motor.
3. Obtain crank (3) (supplied with vehicle) and insert
it through hole.
Emergency operation of sliding / pop-up roof
301
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Manual release for fuel filler flap
Manual release for fuel filler flap
302
Replacing wiper blade insert
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering
lock before replacing the wiper blade, otherwise the
motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Notes:
Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be
scratched or broken.
Make certain that the wiper blade is properly installed.
An improperly installed wiper blade may cause
windshield damage.
P80.20-2089 -26
The manual release knob is located behind the right
side rear compartment trim panel.
In case the central locking system does not release the
fuel filler flap, pull the manual release knob (arrow)
while simultaneously opening the fuel filler flap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal:
Installation:
Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push
wiper blade downward (2) and remove.
Slide (direction of arrow) wiper blade insert into
retainer claws until tabs are engaged.
Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs
and slide (direction of arrow) the wiper blade insert out
of the retainer claws.
Insert wiper blade between tabs (3) on the wiper arm,
and slide into end of wiper arm. Press safety tab upward
until it locks in place.
Replacing wiper blade insert
303
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Replacing wiper blade insert
Rear window wiper blade
304
Removal:
Fold wiper arm (1) away from rear window and rotate
wiper blade (2) until perpendicular to wiper arm. Push
safety tab (3) of attachment link (4) and pull wiper blade
from end of wiper arm.
Installation:
Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place.
Note:
You can also replace the wiper blade insert.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof rack
Installation:
1. Loosen knurled-head screws (2) and turn clamping
plates (3) to side.
2. Mount cross bar (1) on roof railings.
3. Turn clamping plates (3) back under roof railings
and tighten the knurled-head screws (2).
Important!
Do not use the pop-up feature of the sliding/pop-up roof
when positioning and/or placing luggage above it, to
prevent damage to the sliding/pop-up roof panel.
Never place luggage on cross bars only, but load it on
the protective strips, distribute it evenly over the entire
area and fasten it securely.
1 Cross bar
2 Knurled-head screws
3 Clamping plates
4 Protective strips
The cross bars (1) should only be used as guard rails to
prevent luggage from sliding. They must only be
installed above the protective strips (4).
Roof rack
305
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Roof rack
306
Long cargo items should not extend beyond the vehicle
length and should be securely fastened at the front and
rear.
Note:
Use only roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. They
mount to the roof railings and do not require additional
supports (e.g. suction cups or legs). Such supports may
lead to marring of the paint or denting of the roof. For
further information inquire at your Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Prior to and during an extended trip check the roof load,
and retighten the knurled-head screws if necessary.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept
as low as possible since it influences the handling
characteristics of the vehicle.
When driving without roof luggage, the cross bars may
be removed to reduce wind noise.
For load capacity see page 321.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle washing ..........................310
Ornamental moldings ................310
Headlamps, taillamps,
turn signal lenses .......................310
Cleaning the parktronic
system sensors ............................311
Window cleaning ........................311
Wiper blades ...............................311
Light alloy wheels ......................312
Instrument cluster ..................... 312
Steering wheel and
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of
gear selector lever ...................... 312
Cup holder ................................... 312
Seat belts ..................................... 312
Headliner ..................................... 312
Upholstery ................................... 313
the vehicle.................................. 308
Power washer ..............................309
Tar stains .....................................309
Paintwork, painted body
components .................................309
Engine cleaning .......................... 310
Hard plastic trim items ............. 313
Plastic and rubber parts ............ 313
Contents - Vehicle care
307
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Car care
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
308
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during
winter operation.
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow
the instructions on the particular container.
Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when
cleaning the inside.
You should check your vehicle from time to time for
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of
corrosion.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed
for cleaning your vehicle.
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged
areas need to be reundercoated.
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and
cause lasting damage.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-
base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz
because of the possibility of incompatibility between
materials used in the production process and others
applied later.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying
climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt,
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse
influences.
We have selected car-care products and compiled
recommendations which are specially matched to our
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed
or repaired with the car-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is
recommended.
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied
when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and
washing detergent used.
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled
“Vehicle Car Guide”.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding
(i.e. loss of gloss).
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle
always observe manufacturers’ operating instructions.
Do not apply any of these products or wax if your
vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips
from stones, vehicle doors etc.).
Caution!
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.
Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
309
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Engine cleaning
310
Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the
outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged.
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to
protect electrical components and connectors from the
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt
as soon as possible.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax
should be applied to the engine compartment after
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any
wax.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the
inner sides of the wheels.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-
plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or
sponge.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the parktronic system sensors
Window cleaning
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Note:
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering
lock before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Wiper blade
1
1
Clean the wiper blade rubber with a clean cloth and
detergent solution.
1
P88.20-2049-26
Note:
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from steering
lock before cleaning the wiper blade, otherwise the
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
When using a steam cleaner or power washer, aim
nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 4 in.
(10 cm) at sensors (1).
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the
sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
311
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Light alloy wheels
312
Cup holder
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft
bristle brush and a strong spray of water.
Seat belts
Follow instructions on container.
The webbing must not be treated with chemical
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Note:
Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could
lead to corrosion.
Warning!
Instrument cluster
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Headliner
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upholstery
Hard plastic trim items
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be
prevented.
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Leather Upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should not become
wet.
Cloth Upholstery
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
MB Tex Upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
313
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oils...................................... 324
Engine oil additives ...................... 324
Air conditioner refrigerant .......... 324
Brake fluid...................................... 324
Premium unleaded gasoline........ 325
Fuel requirements......................... 325
Gasoline additives......................... 326
Coolants.......................................... 326
Consumer information ................. 328
Technical data
Spare parts service........................ 316
Warranty coverage......................... 316
Identification labels....................... 317
Layout of poly-V-belt drive............ 318
Technical data................................. 319
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -
capacities ................................... 322
Contents - Technical data
315
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Technical data
316
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock
of original spare parts required for maintenance and
repair work. In addition, strategically located parts
distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts
service.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty
Information booklet and your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.
1. New vehicle limited warranty
2. Emission system warranty
3. Emission performance warranty
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission
control systems warranty
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should
be installed.
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Important!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety.
Loss of Service and Warranty Information booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification labels
P63.20-2368-26
1 Certification label
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Technical data
317
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Technical data
318
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
5
3
6
7
4
6
1
7
4
2
5
3
3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4 Engine number
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Crankshaft
5 Body number and paintwork number
6 Emission control label
3 Air conditioner compressor
4 Generator (alternator)
5 Idler pulley
7 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
6 Power steering pump
7 Coolant pump
When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data
Model
E 320 (210.265)1
E 320 AWD (210.282)1
Engine
112
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
Bore
6
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
3.30 in (84.00 mm)
195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)
10:1
Stroke
Total piston displacement
Compression ratio
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
221 hp/5600 rpm
(165 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 232 ft.lb/3000 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
Firing order
6000 rpm
1-4-3-6-2-5
2390 mm
Poly-V-belt
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Technical data
319
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Technical data
320
Rims – Tires
Electrical system
Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset
71/2 J x 16 H 2
1.6 in (41 mm)
Generator (alternator)
Starter motor
Battery
14 V/115 A
12V/1.7 kW
12V/100 Ah
All season tires:
Radial-ply tires
215/55 R 16 93 H
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPER
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK PFR 5 R-11
Winter tires:
Radial-ply tires
215/55 R 16 93 H M+S
Electrode gap
Tightening torque
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
Spare wheel
Rim (steel)
Wheel offset
71/2 J x 16 H 2
1.6 in (41 mm)
All season tire:
Radial-ply tire
215/55 R 16 93 H
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weights (see certification tag)
Main dimensions
Roof load on roof
rails max.
Overall vehicle length
Overall vehicle width
Overall height
Wheel base
189.6 in (4816 mm)
70.8 in (1799 mm)
59.3 in (1505 mm)
111.5 in (2833 mm)
60.2 in (1529 mm)
59.9 in (1521 mm)
220 lb (100 kg)
175 lb (80 kg)
Roof load on protective strips
(distributed over total area) max.
Track, front
Track, rear
Technical data
321
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
322
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Recommended engine oils
Engine with oil filter
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Automatic
transmission
Automatic transmission fluid
Rear axle
1.4 US qt (1.3 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Automatic transmission fluid
MB Power steering fluid
Front axle
E 320 with AWD
E 320 with AWD
0.5 US qt (0.46 l)
Transfer case
Power steering
Front wheel hubs
0.9 US qt (0.9 l)
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each
High temperature roller bearing
grease
Brake system
approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l)
MB Brake fluid (DOT 4)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield washer
system
approx. 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
MB Windshield washer
concentrate “S” 1
Headlamp washer
system
approx. 1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
MB Windshield washer
concentrate “S” 1
Cooling system
approx. 10.6 US qt (10 l)
MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Fuel tank including
a reserve of
approx. 21.1 US gal (80.0 l)
approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioner
system
R-134a refrigerant and special
PAC lubricant (Never R-12)
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see
page 271.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Instruments
323
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Engine oils
324
Air conditioner refrigerant
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on
recommended brands is available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil
is used in the air conditioner system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,
otherwise damage to the system will occur.
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing
the system’s efficiency.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be
harmful to the engine operation.
The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two
years, preferably in the spring.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will provide you with additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Premium unleaded gasoline
Caution!
Fuel requirements
Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM
standard D 439:
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,
follow these precautions:
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane
number and the Motor (M) octane number: [(R+M)/2].
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
• have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible,
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.
• avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%
plus additional cosolvents.
• do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the
vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two
persons and no luggage,
• do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded
gasoline, can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor
pressure etc..
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
325
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Gasoline additives
326
Coolants
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
• corrosion protection,
• freeze protection,
After an extended period of using fuels without such
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
• boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately
-22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
• warm-up hesitation,
• unstable idle,
• knocking/pinging,
• misfire,
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the
boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling
system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year round to provide
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every
3 years.
• power loss.
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be
harmful to the engine operation.
To provide the important corrosion protection, the
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(equals a freeze protection to approx. -22 °F [-30 °C]). If
you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/
antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. -49 °F [-45°C]),
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the engine temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not
use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in
the hot southern regions), you should have the
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for service.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Approx. freeze protection
– 35 °F
(– 37 °C)
– 49 °F
(– 45 °C)
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
5.3 US qt
(5.0 l)
5.8 US qt
(5.5 l)
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The
use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly
shortened service life.)
Therefore the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your car: Mercedes-Benz
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
327
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Consumer information
Consumer information
328
Treadwear
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction
Temperature
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are “AA”,
“A”, “B”, and “C”. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked “C” may
have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are “A” (the highest), “B”, and
“C”, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade “C” corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straightahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause excessive heat build up
and possible tire failure.
Consumer information
329
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
330
Audio system ..................................................................135
Anti-theft system .......................................................137
Button and soft key operation .................................138
Cassette mode ............................................................143
CD changer .................................................................148
CD mode .....................................................................147
Operating and display elements .............................136
Operating safety ........................................................135
Operation – audio and telephone ...........................135
Radio mode ................................................................ 141
Telephone operation .................................................151
Audio systems ...................................................................97
Cassette player ............................................................99
CD player ......................................................................98
Radio .............................................................................97
Automatic central locking ..............................................37
Automatic climate control ............................................126
Activated charcoal filter ...........................................132
Air distribution ..........................................................130
Air recirculation ........................................................ 131
Air volume ..................................................................130
Basic setting ...............................................................129
Defogging windows ...................................................129
Defrosting ...................................................................129
Display and controls .................................................128
Dust filter ................................................................... 131
Index
A
ABS (Antilock brake system) .......................................225
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................245
ABS-SYSTEM - malfunction and
warning messages ....................................................250
Adjusting steering wheel ................................................ 81
Air conditioner refrigerant ...........................................324
Air distribution ..............................................................130
Air volume ...................................................................... 130
Airbag deactivation system ............................................67
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ........................................246
Airbags ..............................................................................70
Alarm system ..............................................................41, 43
Anticorrosion/antifreeze ....................218, 270, 322, 326
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................................225
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................245
Antitheft alarm system ................................................... 41
Aquaplaning ................................................................... 215
Armrest, rear bench ...................................................... 161
Ashtrays ..........................................................................165
Center console, front ................................................165
Rear doors ..................................................................166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Economy .....................................................................129
Front center console
Block heater ....................................................................218
BRAKE ASSIST -
compartment ventilation ....................................133
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 250
Brake assist system (BAS) ........................................... 223
Malfunction indicator lamp .................................... 245
Brake fluid ..................................................................... 324
BRAKE FLUID -
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlet .............................................134
Rear window defroster .............................................130
Residual engine heat utilization (REST) ...............132
Special settings .........................................................129
Automatic transmission ...............................................201
Emergency operation ...............................................209
Fluid level ...................................................................269
Program mode selector switch ...............................208
Selector lever position ..............................................204
malfunction and warning messages ......................251
BRAKE LINING WEAR -
malfunction and warning messages ......................251
Brake pad wear ...............................................................251
Brake warning lamp ..................................................... 243
Brake fluid low ......................................................... 243
Brakes ................................................... 212, 223, 225, 228
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking .............................................290
C
B
Capacities
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system .....................67
Self-test .........................................................................67
BAS (Brake assist system) ............................................223
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................245
Battery .............................................................................283
Battery recycling .......................................................284
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR -
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .............................. 322
Cargo tie-down rings .....................................................177
Catalytic converter .........................................................196
Cellular telephone ..........................................................178
Center console ..................................................................20
Central locking switch ....................................................36
Central locking system ....................................................29
Automatic central locking .........................................37
malfunction and warning messages ......................249
331
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
332
Choosing global or selective mode ...........................32
Electronic main key ....................................................25
Electronic reserve key ................................................26
Locking and unlocking .............................................. 31
Mechanical keys ................................................... 26, 33
Remote control ............................................................25
Summer opening/convenience feature ...................32
COOLANT TEMP. -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 254
Coolant temperature gauge ............................................90
Coolants .......................................................................... 326
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity ........................ 327
Cruise control ................................................................ 220
Cup holder
In center console .......................................................164
In glove box lid ..........................................................162
In rear bench armrest ............................................... 161
CHECK ENGINE
malfunction indicator lamp .....................................242
Check regularly and before a long trip ......................239
Checking engine oil level
Via engine oil level indicator ...................................117
Via oil dipstick ...........................................................268
Child restraint .....................................................59, 67, 78
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .................................308
Clock, setting ...................................................................110
Coin holder in glove box lid .........................................162
COMAND, radio and telephone ...................................184
Combination switch ......................................................122
Consumer information ..................................................328
Control and operation of radio transmitters .............184
COOLANT (coolant level) -
D
Daytime running lamps ................................................120
Deep water
Driving instructions .................................................219
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 248
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 248
Display illumination ........................................................89
Doors ..................................................................................34
Drinking and Driving .................................................... 211
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel ............................................. 211
Driving instructions ...................................................... 211
Driving off ....................................................................... 213
malfunction and warning messages ......................253
Coolant level ...................................................................269
Adding coolant ..........................................................270
Checking ....................................................................269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK ENGINE
E
malfunction indicator lamp ............................... 242
Engine oil additives ...................................................... 324
Engine oil consumption ................................................ 118
Engine oil level
Checking .............................................................117, 268
Warning ..................................................................... 258
ENGINE OIL LEVEL -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 258
Engine oil level indicator .............................................. 117
Engine oils ..................................................................... 324
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ............................ 228
Control switch .......................................................... 230
Malfunction indicator lamp .................................... 245
Synchronizing .......................................................... 229
Warning lamp ........................................................... 245
ETR (Emergency tensioning retractor) .........................69
SRS indicator lamp .................................................. 244
Exterior lamp switch ..................................................... 119
Exterior lamps ................................................................291
Additional turn signals on
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. -
malfunction and warning messages ......................260
Electrical outlet ..............................................................265
Electronic main key .........................................................25
Changing batteries ...................................................298
Synchronizing remote control ................................300
Electronic stability program (ESP) ..............................228
Control switch ...........................................................230
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................245
Synchronizing ...........................................................229
Warning lamp ............................................................245
Emergency call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................186
Emergency engine shut-down .....................................300
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .........................69
SRS indicator lamp ...................................................244
Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................37
Emission control ............................................................197
Emission control label .................................................. 318
Engine compartment .....................................................266
the exterior mirror .............................................. 297
Headlamp assembly ................................................. 292
High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 297
License plate lamps ................................................. 296
Low and high beam .................................................. 293
ENGINE FAN -
malfunction and warning messages ......................252
Engine malfunction
333
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
334
Parking lamps ..................................................294, 295
Replacing bulbs .........................................................291
Side marker lamp, front ...........................................297
Standing lamps .................................................294, 295
Taillamp assemblies .................................................295
Turn signal lamps ............................................294, 295
G
Garage door opener .......................................................179
Gasoline
Additives .................................................................... 326
Fuel requirements ................................................... 325
Premium unleaded .................................................. 325
General notes on the
central locking system ...............................................28
Glove box .........................................................................162
F
First aid kit .....................................................................262
Flexible service system (FSS) .......................................114
H
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with electronic
Hazard warning flasher switch ...................................125
Head restraints
stability program (ESP) ............................................227
Fuel ..................................................................................237
Gasoline additives ....................................................326
Premium unleaded gasoline ................. 237, 323, 325
Fuel cap placement warning ........................................244
Fuel requirements .........................................................325
Fuel reserve warning ....................................................244
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities ...............322
Fuses, electrical .............................................................263
Front seat .....................................................................50
Rear seat .......................................................................51
Rear seat head restraint, storage ..............................52
Synchronizing .............................................................46
Headlamp cleaning system ...........................................121
Headlights ....................................................................... 119
Heated seats ......................................................................54
Hood ................................................................................ 266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
K
Identification labels ....................................................... 317
Illuminated vanity mirrors ...........................................160
Indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster .............................................88, 242
Individual settings ..........................................................110
Infant and child restraint systems ................................78
Information call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................186
Instrument cluster ...........................................................86
Activating .....................................................................89
Illumination .................................................................89
Indicator lamps ...........................................................88
Instruments and controls ............................................... 18
Interior
Keys, vehicle .....................................................................24
L
Lamps, exterior
Fog lamps ...........................................................119, 295
Headlamps ........................................ 119, 255, 292, 310
Parking lamps ...........................................119, 294, 295
Replacing bulbs .........................................................291
Side marker lamp, front ...................................119, 297
Standing lamps .........................................119, 294, 295
Taillamps .......................................... 119, 255, 295, 310
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............................................318
LIGHT SENSOR -
General notes ............................................................. 161
Interior lighting .............................................................159
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 256
Lighter .............................................................................167
LIGHTING SYSTEM -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 255
J
Limp home mode ........................................................... 209
Loading instructions ...................................................... 176
Locking and unlocking ....................................................31
Jump starting ..................................................................285
335
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
336
WASHER FLUID ........................................................ 259
Malfunction message memory ....................................108
Manual release for fuel filler flap .............................. 302
Mechanical keys ...............................................................33
Memory ................................................................ 47, 81, 84
Recalling .......................................................................48
Storing ...........................................................................47
Mirror, exterior, adjusting ..............................................83
Mirror, exterior, rear view ..............................................83
Mirror, inside, rear view .................................................82
Multicontour seat .............................................................53
Multifunction display ......................................................92
Audio systems ..............................................................97
Engine oil level indicator ...........................................96
FSS (Flexible service system) ...................................96
Individual settings .................................................... 110
Malfunction message memory ...............................108
Navigation system .....................................................105
Telephone ...................................................................100
Trip and main odometer ............................................96
Trip computer ............................................................106
Vehicle speed ...............................................................96
Multifunction steering wheel .........................................92
Setting the audio volume ......................................... 113
M
Maintenance ...................................................................185
Malfunction and indicator lamp
in the center console ................................................246
Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster .........................................242
Malfunction and warning messages ...........................247
ABS-SYSTEM .............................................................250
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR .......................................249
BRAKE ASSIST ..........................................................250
BRAKE FLUID ............................................................251
BRAKE LINING WEAR .............................................251
COOLANT (coolant level) .........................................253
COOLANT TEMP. .......................................................254
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit) .........248
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems) ...............248
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. ...............................................260
ENGINE FAN ..............................................................252
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ..................................................258
LIGHT SENSOR .........................................................256
LIGHTING SYSTEM ...................................................255
PARKING BRAKE ......................................................252
REMOVE KEY ............................................................256
STEERING GEAR OIL ...............................................257
TELE AID ....................................................................257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power assistance ............................................................212
Power seats, front .............................................................44
Power windows ...............................................................154
Blocking of rear door window operation ...............155
Opening and closing ...................................................32
Synchronizing ...........................................................156
Problems with your vehicle ............................................ 14
Product information ..........................................................7
N
Navigation system - Multifunctions display ..............105
Night security Illumination .........................................120
O
On-board diagnostic system .........................................242
Operator’s manual ............................................................. 8
Outside temperature indicator ......................................90
Overhead control panel ................................................... 21
R
Radio transmitters .........................................................184
Rain sensor .....................................................................123
Rear view mirrors ............................................................82
Antiglare night position .............................................82
Exterior .........................................................................83
Inside ............................................................................82
Parking position ..........................................................85
Storing mirror positions in memory ........................84
Rear window defroster ..................................................130
Rear window wiper/washer .........................................124
Rear-facing bench seat .................................................. 174
Remote control .................................................................29
Battery replacement ................................................ 298
P
Panic button ......................................................................33
Parcel net in front passenger footwell .......................178
Parking ............................................................................ 213
Parking assist (Parktronic) ..........................................232
Malfunction ...............................................................236
Parktronic switch ......................................................236
Sensors .......................................................................233
Warning indicators ...................................................234
Parking brake ...............................210, 212, 213, 229, 243
PARKING BRAKE -
malfunction and warning messages ......................252
337
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
338
REMOVE KEY -
Vehicles without seat ventilation .............................55
Seat ventilation ................................................................57
Seats ...................................................................................44
Memory function .........................................................47
Multicontour seat ........................................................53
Service indicator
See Flexible service system (FSS) .......................... 114
Setting the audio volume .............................................. 113
Side marker lamp .......................................................... 297
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................................................156
Emergency operation ...............................................301
Express opening ........................................................158
Opening and closing ...................................................32
Synchronizing ...........................................................158
Snow chains ....................................................................216
SOS-call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................186
Spare parts service ........................................................ 316
Spare wheel ................................................................... 272
Special settings (Automatic climate control) ............129
Split rear bench seat ......................................................168
SRS (Supplemental restraint system) ...........................68
Indicator lamp .......................................................... 244
SRS malfunction ..........................................................70
Start lock-out .....................................................................27
Starting and turning off the engine ........................... 200
malfunction and warning messages ......................256
Replacing bulbs ..............................................................291
Replacing wiper blade insert .......................................302
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................ 15
Reserve key .......................................................................26
Residual engine heat utilization (REST) .................... 132
Roadside assistance ......................................................... 10
Roadside assistance call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................186
Roof rack .........................................................................305
S
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor and airbag ................................ 76
Seat belts ...........................................................................59
Fastening ...................................................................... 61
Rear-facing bench seat ...............................................63
Seat belt nonusage warning system ........................60
Unfastening ..................................................................64
Warning lamp ............................................................246
Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................59
Seat heater ........................................................................54
Vehicles with seat ventilation ...................................56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEERING GEAR OIL -
Tele Aid ............................................................................186
Emergency calls ........................................................187
Information ................................................................ 191
Initiating an emergency call manually ..................189
Roadside Assistance .................................................190
malfunction and warning messages ......................257
Steering lock ...................................................................198
Steering wheel adjustment ............................................ 81
Storage compartments
Above ashtray in center console ............................163
Glove box .................................................................... 162
In center console .......................................................163
Stowing things in the vehicle .......................................176
Sun visors .......................................................................160
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ...........................68
Indicator lamp ...........................................................244
SRS malfunction .........................................................70
TELE AID -
malfunction and warning messages ..................... 257
Telephone ........................................................................100
General notes .............................................................184
Incoming call .............................................................104
Redialing ....................................................................102
Telephone book .........................................................100
Telephones and two-way radios ...................................184
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................185
Tires .................................................................................214
Driving instructions .................................................214
Rims and tires .......................................................... 320
Rotating wheels ........................................................ 275
Tire inflation pressure ............................................ 282
Tire replacement .......................................................274
Tire speed rating .......................................................216
Tire traction ...............................................................215
Winter driving instructions .....................................217
Tow-away alarm ................................................................43
Towing the vehicle ........................................................ 288
T
Tachometer ....................................................................... 91
Tailgate ..............................................................................38
Technical data ................................................................ 319
Electrical system .......................................................320
Main dimensions ......................................................321
Rims and Tires ..........................................................320
Weights .......................................................................321
339
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
340
Transmission selector lever,
Wheels .............................................................................274
Changing ................................................................... 277
Light alloy wheels .....................................................312
Rims and tires .......................................................... 320
Rotating ..................................................................... 275
Spare wheel ................................................................276
Where to find it ................................................................ 13
manually unlocking ..................................................290
Traveling abroad ............................................................ 219
Trip computer .................................................................106
Trip odometer ................................................................... 91
Turn signal failure .........................................................122
Turn signals ....................................................................122
Windshield and headlamp washer
fluid mixing ratio ......................................................271
V
Windshield and headlamp washer system
Refilling ......................................................................271
Winter driving ................................................................ 218
Winter driving instructions ..........................................217
Wiper blade
Vanity mirrors ................................................................160
Vehicle jack .....................................................................273
Vehicle tools ....................................................................272
Replacing insert ....................................................... 302
W
Warranty Coverage ........................................................ 316
WASHER FLUID -
malfunction and warning messages ......................259
What you should know at the gas station ..................237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your
vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.00-3001-26
Press time 10/31/00
MBUSA/TI
Printed in the U.S.A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order No. 6515 1079 13 Part No. 210 584 4996 USA Edition B 2001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|